Sra4-Umn 6-13ghz User Manual Ok

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY
User Manual
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) SDH Split Radio UMN
911-381/02C0000 Issue 7, March 2006
Copyright (C) Siemens S.p.A. 2006 V.le Piero e Alberto Pirelli, 10 I-20126 Milano
Issued by Customer Documentation Department S.S. 11 Padana Superiore, km 158 I-20060 Cassina de Pecchi MI
DISCLAIMER Siemens may have patents, patent applications, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights relevant to the subject matters present in this document. If not explicitly defined by a license agreement written by Siemens, the ownership of this document does not give any use license for the above mentioned patents, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual properties. For your convenience, Siemens may make this document available. The entire risk deriving from the use, or the results of the use, of this document are at users charge. The information contained in this document is subjected to changes without notice. Technical specifications and features are binding only insofar as they are specifically and expressly agreed previously in a written contract. Siemens gives no assurance relevant to the accuracy of the results or of the output deriving from such information. In case of utilization of the information transferred by means of this document, we advise You to verify if the export licenses, required by the laws, have been granted or if there are not any other impediments arising from the laws in course in Italy, Germany or relevant to the export.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN 911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
STATUS OF MANUAL

STATUS OF MANUAL Current: Previous: Issue 7, March 2006 Issue 6, January 2006
In Issue 7, March 2006, as to the previous Issue 6, January 2006: The SRA4 IDU-STM1 has been added; the 11 GHz ODU extension P/N have been updated; the Optical Safety has been modified.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN 911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006 R-1
STATUS OF MANUAL

R-2 SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN 911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
LA
PA G E
INDEX
INDEX
STATUS OF MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R.1 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I.1 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I.7 LIST OF TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I.11
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1

1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.1.1 1.2.1.1.1 1.2.1.2 1.2.1.3 1.2.1.4 1.2.2 1.3 FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Object of the present manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Contents of the user manual (UMN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 SAFETY RULES AND USE PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Optical safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Warnings for the optical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Waste equipment management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 External operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 ESDS precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
PLANNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.1.5.1 2.1.5.1.1 2.1.5.1.2 2.1.5.1.3 2.1.5.2 2.1.5.2.1 2.1.5.2.2 2.1.6 2.1.6.1 2.1.6.2 2.1.6.3 2.1.7 2.1.7.1 2.1.7.1.1 2.1.7.1.2 2.1.7.1.3 2.1.7.2 2.1.7.2.1 GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 RF channeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 System types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 Modulation type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 System building blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 Indoor section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 1+0/2+0/1+1 configuration (SRA4 IDU and SRA4 IDU-STM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 2x(1+1) configuration (SRA4 IDU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 N+1 configuration (SRA4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11 Outdoor section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13 AP ODU (Transceiver for AP channelling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13 AP/CC ODU (Transceiver for AP or CC channelling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15 IDU-ODU interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17 Radio signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17 IDU/ODU service auxiliary channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17 ODU power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17 System protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18 1+1 protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18 Switching criteria in the Tx Switch (Trib. Switch). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18 Switching criteria in the Rx Switch (Dem. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19 Switching criteria in the ODU Hot Stand-by Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19 N+1 protection (with SRA4 IDU only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22 NE Controller behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN 911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006 I-1
INDEX

2.1.7.2.2 BB Card Equipping and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.7.2.3 Auxiliary Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.7.2.4 RS Controller and Protection Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.8 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.9 System power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.10 Facility & services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.10.1 Equipment management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.10.1.1F interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.10.1.2Q interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.11 Mechanical structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.12 Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.1.1 2.2.1.2 2.2.1.3 2.2.1.4 2.2.1.5 2.2.1.5.1 2.2.1.6 2.2.1.7 2.2.1.8 2.2.1.9 2.2.1.10 2.2.1.11 2.2.1.12 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.7.1 2.2.7.2 2.2.7.3 2.2.7.4 2.2.7.5 2.2.7.6 2.2.7.7 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.3.1 2.3.3.2 2.3.3.3 2.3.3.4 2.3.4 2.3.4.1 2.3.4.1.1 2.3.4.1.2 2.3.4.1.3 2.3.4.1.4 2.3.4.1.5 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Electrical Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDU/ODU Connection Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Characteristics of the Transmitter (Hot Standby version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATPC (Automatic Transmit Power Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modemodulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Service Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Baseband Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1+1 protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External alarms electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Consumption (from 48 V battery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop-backs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMC/EMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF Channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6L GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6U GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor assembly composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDU equipment as a function of the configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor assembly composition (IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Licence fees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading kits for on-field upgrading of the licence types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor assembly composition (ODU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ODU AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 GHz ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 GHz ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 GHz ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 GHz ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 GHz ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24 2.24 2.24 2.31 2.31 2.33 2.34 2.35 2.35 2.36 2.36 2.37 2.37 2.37 2.39 2.40 2.40 2.41 2.41 2.41 2.42 2.42 2.42 2.43 2.43 2.43 2.44 2.45 2.45 2.46 2.46 2.47 2.47 2.48 2.49 2.52 2.55 2.56 2.57 2.58 2.59 2.70 2.71 2.74 2.77 2.86 2.86 2.87 2.87 2.87 2.88 2.89 2.90 2.91

I-2 SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN 911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
INDEX

2.3.4.2 2.3.4.2.1 2.3.4.2.2 2.3.4.2.3 2.3.4.2.4 2.3.4.2.5 2.3.5 2.3.5.1 2.3.5.2 2.3.6 2.3.6.1 2.3.6.2 2.3.6.3 2.3.6.4 2.3.7 2.3.7.1 2.3.7.2 2.3.7.2.1 2.3.7.2.2 2.3.7.3 2.3.7.4 2.3.7.4.1 2.3.7.4.2 2.3.7.5 2.3.7.5.1 2.3.7.5.2 2.3.7.6 2.3.7.6.1 2.3.7.6.2 ODU AP/CC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.93 ODU 6 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.93 7 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.94 8 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.95 11 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.96 13 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.97 IDU/ODU cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.99 3/10 50 ohm coaxial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.99 1/4 50 ohm coaxial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.100 ODU coaxial connections for the CO-CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.102 2+0 CC configuration connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.102 2x(1+1) FD CC configuration connections (with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.104 2x(1+1) FD CC configuration connections (with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.107 2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC configuration connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.110 Supporting frames (AP and AP/CC ODU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.113 1+0 Supporting frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.113 1+1 Supporting frames for Hot stand-by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.115 Balanced frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.115 Unbalanced frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.116 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.118 Supporting frames for N+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) (6U/6L, 7 and 8 GHz) 2.120 Supporting frames for 2+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.120 Supporting frames for 3+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.121 Supporting frames for N+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) (10, 11 and 13 GHz) . 2.122 Supporting frames for 2+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.122 Supporting frames for 3+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.123 Supporting frames for Co-Channel FD configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.124 Supporting frames for (2+0) Co-Channel FD configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.124 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with one antenna) ODU 6L/6U, 7 and 8 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.125 2.3.7.6.3 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with one antenna) ODU 11 GHz and 13 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.126 2.3.7.6.4 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with two antennas) . . . . . . . . 2.127 2.3.7.7 Supporting frames for Co-Channel Hot Standby configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.129 2.3.7.7.1 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel Hot Standby configuration - ODU 6, 7, 8, 11 and 13 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.129
INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.2.1 3.1.2.2 3.1.2.3 3.1.2.4 3.1.2.5 3.1.2.6 3.1.2.7 3.1.3 3.1.3.1 3.1.4 3.2 3.2.1 INSTALLATION OF THE RACK ETSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 View of the rack ETSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 Drilling planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 In-line installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 Back-to-back installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 Wall installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8 In-line installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame on floating floor or on wall. . . . . 3.9 Back-to-back installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame on floating floor . . . . . . 3.10 Characteristics and installation procedure of the self-locking bolts for floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11 Characteristics and installation procedure of the expansion bolts for walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13 Ground connections for the rack ETSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13 Composition of the fixing kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15 IDU installation in the ETSI rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15

INDEX

3.2.2 3.2.2.1 3.2.2.2 3.2.2.3 3.2.3 3.2.3.1 3.2.4 3.2.4.1 3.2.5 3.2.6 3.2.6.1 3.2.6.2 3.2.6.3 3.2.6.4 3.2.6.5 3.2.6.6 3.2.7 3.2.7.1 3.2.7.2 3.2.7.3 3.2.7.4 3.2.7.5 3.2.7.6 3.2.7.7 3.2.7.8 3.2.7.9 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.1.1 3.4.1.2 3.4.1.3 3.4.1.3.1 3.4.1.3.2 3.4.1.3.3 3.4.2 3.4.2.1 3.4.2.2 3.4.2.3 3.4.2.3.1 3.4.2.3.2 3.4.3 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.4.1 3.5.4.2 ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ODU Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ODU flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1+0 FRAME INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1+0 Frame - P/N and flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1+1 frame installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1+1 Frame - Attenuation, type of flange and P/N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solar shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Not integrated system (solution with flexible waveguide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1+0 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1+1 HSBY system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2+0 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2x(1+1) FD system with dual polarization co-channel (with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2x(1+1) FD system with dual polarization co-channel (with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2x(1+1) Hot Standby system with dual polarization co-channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Not integrated system (solution with elliptical waveguide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1+0 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1+1 system HSBY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2+0 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2x(1+1) FD system with dual polarization co-channel (with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2x(1+1) FD system with dual polarization co-channel (with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2x(1+1) Hot Standby system with dual polarization co-channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Static desiccator for small system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressurization with external dehydrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P/N and composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTERNAL CONNECTIONS ( for SRA4 IDU only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2+0 CC Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2x(1+1) FD CC configuration (with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2x(1+1) FD CC configuration (with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N+1 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRA4 IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Primary supply voltage connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base connection elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection elements for 1+0 system (P/N 597-525/21). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection elements for 1+1/2+0 system (P/N 597-525/22) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection elements for upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 (P/N 597-525/33) . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRA4 IDU-STM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Primary supply voltage connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External connection elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection elements for 1+0 system (P/N 597-526/77). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection elements for 1+1 system (P/N 597-526/78). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ODU connections for received field measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDU/ODU CONNECTION WITH BRAIDED OR 1/4 COAXIAL CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable - ODU side connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grounding connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pole fixing of the grounding plate kit (P/N 332-309/91) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable - Typical fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended clamp spacing for Braided coaxial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended clamp spacing for 1/4 coaxial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15 3.15 3.16 3.16 3.19 3.19 3.24 3.24 3.29 3.30 3.30 3.31 3.32 3.33 3.34 3.35 3.36 3.36 3.37 3.38 3.39 3.40 3.41 3.42 3.42 3.43 3.49 3.49 3.51 3.54 3.57 3.60 3.61 3.61 3.61 3.62 3.68 3.68 3.69 3.69 3.73 3.73 3.74 3.79 3.79 3.80 3.81 3.82 3.82 3.83 3.84 3.85 3.86 3.86

INDEX

3.5.5 3.5.6 3.5.7 Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable - Connection on IDU side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.87 Braided coaxial cable Andrew and Intercond sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88 1/4 coaxial cable Andrew set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.89
ACTIVATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.4.1 4.2.4.2 4.2.4.3 4.2.4.4 4.2.4.5 4.2.4.6 4.2.4.7 4.2.4.8 4.3 4.3.1 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 PRESETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 System E2PROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 ACTIVATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Local checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 IDU first installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Alignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 Checks on equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 List of checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 Control of the system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 Configuration of IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 Received and Transmitted Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 Switching test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 Background BER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 Final checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 Restore of the operating conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 LIST AND USE OF ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 List and use of accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITIONS AND ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 Normal operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 Alarm conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.2.1 5.1.2.2 5.1.2.3 5.1.2.3.1 5.1.2.3.2 5.1.2.3.3 5.1.2.3.4 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.2.1 5.2.2.2 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 TROUBLESHOOTIN614-041/17G AND RESTORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 ODU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 IDU-ODU cable replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 IDU unit replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 BB+MODEM unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 Controller unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 Alarm Restitution Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 Fans unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 LIST OF SPARE PARTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 IDU spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 ODU spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 AP ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 AP/CC ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 PROCEDURE FOR SPARE PARTS USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10 Procedure for the IDU unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10 Procedure for the ODU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10

INDEX

6 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
6.1 6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.1.3.1 6.1.3.2 6.1.3.2.1 6.1.3.3 6.1.3.4 6.1.3.5 6.1.3.6 6.1.3.7 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.4.1 6.2.4.2 6.2.4.2.1 6.2.4.2.2 ODU FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IF unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FSK sub-unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microwave Transceiver Front-end subunit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual UHF VCO subunit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microwave Duplexer filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tx Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATPC option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 6.1 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.4 6.4 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6
IDU FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7 Controller unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 Alarm Restitution Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 Fan unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 BB-MODEM unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 BB Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 Modem Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10 Cross Polarization Interface Canceller (XPIC) (not available in the BB-Modem units P/N 612-314/64-65) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12 6.2.4.2.3 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13 6.3 LED, MONITORING POINTS, CONNECTORS AND SWITCHES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Fig. 2.1 Fig. 2.2 Fig. 2.3 Fig. 2.4 Fig. 2.5 Fig. 2.6 Fig. 2.7 Fig. 2.8 Fig. 2.9 Fig. 2.10 Fig. 2.11 Fig. 2.12 Fig. 2.13 Fig. 2.14 Fig. 2.15 Fig. 2.16 Fig. 2.17 Fig. 2.18 Fig. 2.19 Fig. 2.20 Fig. 2.21 Fig. 2.22 Fig. 2.23 Fig. 2.24 Fig. 2.25 Fig. 2.26 Fig. 2.27 Fig. 2.28 Fig. 2.29 Fig. 2.30 Fig. 2.31 Fig. 2.32 Fig. 2.33 Fig. 2.34 Fig. 2.35 Fig. 2.36 Fig. 2.37 Fig. 2.38 Fig. 2.39 Fig. 2.40 Fig. 2.41 Fig. 2.42 Fig. 2.43 Fig. 2.44 Fig. 2.45 Fig. 2.46 Fig. 2.47 Fig. 2.48 Fig. 2.49 SRA 4 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 IDU in 1+0 and 1+1/2+0 configurations (SRA4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 IDU in 1+0 and 1+1/2+0 configurations (SRA4 IDU-STM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 IDU in 2x(1+1) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 IDU in N+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11 Indoor Section Block Diagram (SRA4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12 Indoor Section Block Diagram (SRA4 IDU-STM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13 Outdoor Section Block diagram (ODU for AP channelling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14 Outdoor Section Block diagram (ODU for AP/CC channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16 1+1 configuration system block diagram without tributary protection ( with SRA4 IDU and SRA4 IDU-STM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20 1+1 configuration system block diagram with tributary protection( with SRA4 IDU only) . . . . . . . . 2.21 Physical channels used to manage switching functionality in 3+1 system type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23 N+1 (3+1) configuration system block diagram: Tx section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29 N+1 (3+1) configuration system block diagram: Rx section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30 Battery protection block diagram (in IDU assembly). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32 SOH Bytes Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.33 Equipment Management Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35 Loop-back 1 (Trib.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44 Loop-back 2 (Trib. side int.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44 Loop-back 3 (Radio ext.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44 1+0 system with independent antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.60 1+1 system with Hot Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.61 2+0 system with dual polarization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.62 1+1 system copolar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.63 2+0 system with dual polarization co-channel configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.64 2x(1+1) FD with dual polarization co-channel configuration (with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.65 2x(1+1) FD with dual polarization co-channel configuration (with two antennas). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.66 2x(1+1) Hot Standby with dual polarization co-channel configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.67 N+1 (2+1) system with Alternate Pattern (AP) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.68 N+1 (3+1) system with Alternate Pattern (AP) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.69 1+0/1+1/2+0 Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.71 N+1 Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.72 2x(1+1) FD CC Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.73 2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.73 1+0/1+1/2+0 SRA4 IDU systems Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.79 1+0/1+1/2+0 SRA4 IDU-STM1 systems Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.81 2x(1+1) CC SRA4 IDU systems Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.83 N+1 (2+1/3+1) SRA4 IDU systems Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.85 Outdoor assembly (AP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.92 Outdoor assembly (AP/CC ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.98 3/10 or 1/4 coaxial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.101 Connection diagram between the AP/CC ODUs for CC configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.102 Connection diagram between the ODUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.103 Connection diagram between the ODUs for CC configuration (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna) . 2.104 IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.105 RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna). . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.106 Connection diagram between the ODUs for CC configuration (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas) . 2.107 IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.108 RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.109


Fig. 2.50 Fig. 2.51 Fig. 2.52 Fig. 2.53 Fig. 2.54 Fig. 2.55 Fig. 2.56 Fig. 2.57 Fig. 2.58 Fig. 2.59 Fig. 2.60 Fig. 2.61 Fig. 2.62 Fig. 2.63 Fig. 2.64 Fig. 2.65 Fig. 2.66 Fig. 2.67 Fig. 2.68 Fig. 3.1 Fig. 3.2 Fig. 3.3 Fig. 3.4 Fig. 3.5 Fig. 3.6 Fig. 3.7 Fig. 3.8 Fig. 3.9 Fig. 3.10 Fig. 3.11 Fig. 3.12 Fig. 3.13 Fig. 3.14 Fig. 3.15 Fig. 3.16 Fig. 3.17 Fig. 3.18 Fig. 3.19 Fig. 3.20 Fig. 3.21 Fig. 3.22 Fig. 3.23 Fig. 3.24 Fig. 3.25 Fig. 3.26 Fig. 3.27 Fig. 3.28 Fig. 3.29 Fig. 3.30 Fig. 3.31 Fig. 3.32 Fig. 3.33 Fig. 3.34 Fig. 3.35 Fig. 3.36 Connection diagram between the ODUs for CC configuration (2x(1+1) Hot Standby) . . . . . . . . 2.110 IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) Hot Standby). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.111 RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) Hot Standby) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.112 1+0 Supporting frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.113 1+0 Supporting frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.114 1+1 Balanced supporting frame for Hot Standby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.115 1+1 Supporting unbalanced frame for Hot Standby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.116 1+1 Supporting frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.117 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Co-polar). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.118 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Cross-polar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.119 Supporting frames for 2+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.120 Supporting frames for 3+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.121 Supporting frames for 2+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.122 Supporting frames for 3+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.123 Supporting frames for (2+0) Co-Channel FD configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.124 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with one antenna). . . . . . . . . . . . 2.125 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with one antenna). . . . . . . . . . . . 2.126 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . 2.127 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel Hot Standby configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.129 View of the rack ETSI with overall dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 General dimensions for the rack ETSI operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 Fixing of the lower part: floor drilling plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 Fixing of the upper part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 Fixing of the lower part: floor drilling plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 Fixing of the upper part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 Fixing of the lower part: floor drilling plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8 Drilling plane for the in-line fixing of the Rack ETSI on floating floor and on wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9 Drilling plane for the back-to-back fixing of the Rack ETSI on floating floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 Characteristics and installation procedure of the self-locking bolt for floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11 Characteristics and installation procedure of the self-locking bolt for walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 Ground connections of the Rack ETSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13 ODU (AP) layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17 ODU (AP/CC) Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18 1+0 frame - Pole fixing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20 1+0 frame - O-Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21 1+0 frame - ODU installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22 1+0 frame - installed ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23 1+1 frame - Pole fixing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25 1+1 frame - O-Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26 1+1 frame - ODU installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27 1+1 frame - installed ODUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28 Solar shield installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29 Connections (1+0 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.30 Connections (1+1 Hot Standby system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.31 Connections (2+0 system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32 Connections (2x(1+1) FD CC system with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33 Connections (2x(1+1) FD CC system with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34 Connections (2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35 Connections (1+0 system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36 Connections (1+1 Hot Standby system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37 Connections (2+0 system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38 Connections (2x(1+1) FD CC system with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39 Connections (2x(1+1) FD CC system with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.40 Connections (2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.41 Static desiccator for small system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42


Fig. 3.37 Fig. 3.38 Fig. 3.39 Fig. 3.40 Fig. 3.41 Fig. 3.42 Fig. 3.43 Fig. 3.44 Fig. 3.45 Fig. 3.46 Fig. 3.47 Fig. 3.48 Fig. 3.49 Fig. 3.50 Fig. 3.51 Fig. 3.52 Fig. 3.53 Fig. 3.54 Fig. 3.55 Fig. 3.56 Fig. 3.57 Fig. 3.58 Fig. 3.59 Fig. 3.60 Fig. 3.61 Fig. 3.62 Fig. 3.63 Fig. 3.64 Fig. 3.65 Fig. 3.66 Fig. 3.67 Fig. 3.68 Fig. 3.69 Fig. 3.70 Fig. 4.1 Fig. 4.2 Fig. 4.3 Fig. 4.4 Fig. 4.5 Fig. 4.6 Fig. 4.7 Fig. 5.1 Fig. 5.2 Fig. 5.3 Fig. 5.4 Fig. 5.5 Fig. 5.6 Fig. 6.1 Fig. 6.2 Fig. 6.3 Fig. 6.4 Fig. 6.5 Fig. 6.6 Fig. 6.7 Fig. 6.8 Pressurization with external dehydrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42 IDU assembly with CC configuration connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.49 ODU AP/CC assemblies with CC configuration connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50 IDU assembly with CC configuration connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.51 IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52 RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.53 IDU assembly with CC configuration connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.54 IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.55 RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.56 IDU assembly with CC configuration connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.57 IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) Hot Standby)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.58 RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs ( 2x(1+1) FD with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.59 Connection between the IDU assemblies (B-link and E-link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.60 Primary Power Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.61 Connectors not used in the N+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.62 155 Mbit/s Tributary Coaxial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.63 WST 2 Mbit/s Coaxial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.64 Alarm Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.64 LCT (RS 232) Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.66 64 kbit/s service channel connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.67 Connection kit for 1+0 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.70 Connection kit for 1+1/2+0 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.71 Connection kit for 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.72 Primary Power Supply Connections in IDU assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.73 155 Mbit/s Tributary Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.74 Alarm Connector (IDU assembly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.75 LCT (RS 232) Connector (IDU shelf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.77 64 kbit/s service channel connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.78 Connector for the measurement of received field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.81 Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable - ODU side connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.82 Grounding connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.83 Pole fixing of the grounding plate kit (P/N 332-309/91) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.84 Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable - Typical fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.85 IBraided or 1/4 coaxial cable - Connection on IDU side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.87 IDU Key position (Alarm Restitution unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 ODU (AP) connection for the measurement of the received field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 ODU (AP/CC) connection for the measurement of the received field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 1+0/1+1 system (SRA4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 1+0/1+1 system (SRA4 IDU-STM1) . . . . . . . . 4.9 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 2x(1+1)CC system (SRA4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a N+1 configuration (SRA4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 LEDs in 1+1/2+0 configuration (SRA4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 LEDs in 1+1/2+0 configuration (SRA4 IDU-STM1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 LEDs in N+1 configuration (SRA4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Alarm Restitution unit replacement management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 Flow chart No. 1 - Intervention procedure because of failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 ODU Disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11 Outdoor unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 MWTF simplified block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 IDU Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7 Block diagram of the BB-MODEM unit: BB Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10 XPIC Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12 Block diagram of the BB-MODEM unit: MODEM Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14 Front panel of the SRA4 IDU with electrically interfaced BB-MODEM unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15 Front panel of the SRA4 IDU with optically interfaced BB-MODEM unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16


Fig. 6.9 Fig. 6.10 Fig. 6.11 Fig. 6.12 Fig. 6.13 Fig. 6.14 Front panel of the SRA4 IDU-STM1 with electrically interfaced BB-MODEM unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel of the SRA4 IDU-STM1 with optically interfaced BB-MODEM unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED CH. A ON: block diagram without tributary protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED CH. A ON: block diagram with tributary protection (with SRA4 IDU only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED CH. B ON: block diagram without tributary protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED CH. B ON: block diagram with tributary protection (with SRA4 IDU only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 6.18 6.20 6.21 6.22 6.23

LIST OF TABLES
LIST OF TABLES
Tab. 2.1 Tab. 2.2 Tab. 2.3 Tab. 2.4 Tab. 2.5 Tab. 2.6 Tab. 2.7 Tab. 2.8 Tab. 2.9 Tab. 2.10 Tab. 2.11 Tab. 2.12 Tab. 2.13 Tab. 2.14 Tab. 2.15 Tab. 2.16 Tab. 2.17 Tab. 2.18 Tab. 2.19 Tab. 2.20 Tab. 2.21 Tab. 2.22 Tab. 2.23 Tab. 2.24 Tab. 2.25 Tab. 2.26 Tab. 2.27 Tab. 2.28 Tab. 2.29 Tab. 2.30 Tab. 2.31 Tab. 2.32 Tab. 2.33 Tab. 2.34 Tab. 2.35 Tab. 2.36 Tab. 2.37 Tab. 2.38 Tab. 2.39 Tab. 2.40 Tab. 2.41 Tab. 2.42 Tab. 2.43 RF 6 GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 RF 7 GHz channelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 RF 8 GHz channelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 RF 10 GHz channelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 RF 11 GHz channelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 RF 13 GHz channelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Base System Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 BB-MODEM unit association in 2x(1+1) configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 Switching criteria in the Tx Switch (Trib. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18 Switching criteria in the Rx Switch (Dem. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19 Switching criteria in the ODU Hot Stand-by Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19 Section OverHead bytes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.34 Short cable/Long cable setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.39 Max output power (typical value and tolerance at ODU flange) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.40 Max output power (guaranteed value at ODU flange) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.40 RF transmitted spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.40 Rx guaranteed thresholds (dBm) for 128 TCM - 4D at ETSI point C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.41 Rx guaranteed thresholds (dBm) for 64 TCM - 4D at ETSI point C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.41 Modulation Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.41 Typical Hitless switch thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.42 Maximum Power consumption (from battery 48 V) with 10% tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.43 6L GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.383-7 MAIN (1 digit cod. 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.47 6L GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.383-7 INTERLEAVED (1 digit cod. 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.47 6U GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.384-7 MAIN (1 digit cod. 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.48 6U GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.384-7 INTERLEAVED (1 digit cod. 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.48 7 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 3 (1st digit ext. P/N = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49 7 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 1 (1st digit ext. P/N = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50 7 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.385-6 (1st digit ext. P/N = 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50 7 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.385-6 (1st digit ext. P/N = 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.51 7 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 4 (1st digit ext. P/N = 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.51 8 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 1 MAIN (1st digit ext. P/N = 1) . . . . . . . . . 2.52 8 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 1 INTERLEAVED (1st digit ext. P/N = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.53 8 GHz channelling according to OIRT/ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 4 (1st digit ext. P/N = 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.53 8 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.386-6 (1st digit ext. P/N = 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54 8 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 3 (1st digit ext. P/N = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54 10 GHz channelling according to CEPT.Rec 12-05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.55 11 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.387 Recommends 1 Main (1st digit ext. P/N = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.56 11 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.387 Recommends 1 Interleaved/Annex 1 (1st digit ext. P/N = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.56 11 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.387 Annex 2/CEPT 12-06 Recommends 3 (1st digit ext. P/N = 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.57 13 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.497-6 Main (Interleaved) (1 digit ext. P/N = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.57 System configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.59 SRA 4 equipment composition (P/N 802-300/12). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.70 System types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.74

LIST OF TABLES

Tab. 2.44 Tab. 2.45 Tab. 2.46 Tab. 2.47 Tab. 2.48 Tab. 2.49 Tab. 2.50 Tab. 2.51 Tab. 2.52 Tab. 2.53 Tab. 2.54 Tab. 2.55 Tab. 2.56 Tab. 2.57 Tab. 2.58 Tab. 2.59 Tab. 2.60 Tab. 2.61 Tab. 2.62 Tab. 2.63 Tab. 2.64 Tab. 2.65 Tab. 2.66 Tab. 2.67 Tab. 2.68 Tab. 2.69 Tab. 2.70 Tab. 2.71 Tab. 2.72 Tab. 2.73 Tab. 2.74 Tab. 2.75 Tab. 2.76 Tab. 2.77 Tab. 2.78 Tab. 2.79 Tab. 2.80 Tab. 2.81 Tab. 2.82 Tab. 2.83 Tab. 2.84 Tab. 2.85 Tab. 2.86 Tab. 2.87 Tab. 2.88 Tab. 2.89 Tab. 2.90 Tab. 2.91 Tab. 3.1 Tab. 3.2 Tab. 3.3 Tab. 3.4 Supported units in system types 1, 2, ... 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.75 Supported units in system types 7, 8. 9 and 10 (2x(1+1) CC version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.75 Supported units in system type 11 (2+1/3+1 version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.76 1+0 Electrical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.78 1+1/2+0 Electrical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.78 1+0 Optical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.78 1+1/2+0 Optical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.78 Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.79 1+0 Electrical SRA4 IDU-STM1 composition (P/N 702-300/12F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.80 1+1/2+0 Electrical SRA4 IDU-STM1 composition (P/N 702-300/12M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.80 1+0 Optical SRA4 IDU-STM1 composition (P/N 702-300/12G). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.80 1+1/2+0 Optical SRA4 IDU-STM1 composition (P/N 702-300/12F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.80 Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.81 2x(1+1) CC Electrical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12C for IDU V(H) Pol. and IDU H(V) Pol.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.82 2x(1+1) CC Optical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12C for IDU V(H) Pol. and IDU H(V) Pol.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.82 2+1/3+1 Electrical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12C for IDU Main and /12A for IDU EXT.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.84 2+1/3+1 Optical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12D for IDU Main and /12B for IDU EXT.) 2.84 Licence key P/Ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.86 Upgrading kit P/Ns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.86 7 GHz - ODU Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.87 8 GHz - ODU Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.88 10 GHz - ODU composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.89 11 GHz - ODU composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.90 13 GHz - ODU composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.91 6 GHz - ODU Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.93 7 GHz - ODU Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.94 8 GHz - ODU Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.95 11 GHz - ODU composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.96 13 GHz - ODU composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.97 Andrew cable set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.99 Intercond cable set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.99 Andrew cable set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.100 1+0 Supporting frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.113 1+1 Balanced supporting frame for Hot Standby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.115 1+1 Supporting unbalanced frame for Hot Standby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.116 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Co-polar). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.118 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Cross-polar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.119 1+0 Supporting frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.120 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Co-polar). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.120 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Co-polar). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.121 1+0 Supporting frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.122 1+1 Balanced supporting frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.122 1+1 Balanced supporting frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.123 1+0 Supporting frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.124 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Co-polar). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.125 1+1 Balanced supporting frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.126 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Cross-polar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.128 1+1 Supporting unbalanced frame for Hot Standby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.129 Rack ETSI list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 Fixing kit for racks ETSI (333-043/81) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14 Fixing kit for racks ETSI for floating floors (Optional) (332-309/36) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14 ODU Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16

LIST OF TABLES

Tab. 3.5 Tab. 3.6 Tab. 3.7 Tab. 3.8 Tab. 3.9 Tab. 3.10 Tab. 3.11 Tab. 3.12 Tab. 3.13 Tab. 3.14 Tab. 3.15 Tab. 3.16 Tab. 3.17 Tab. 3.18 Tab. 3.19 Tab. 3.20 Tab. 3.21 Tab. 3.22 Tab. 3.23 Tab. 3.24 Tab. 3.25 Tab. 3.26 Tab. 3.27 Tab. 3.28 Tab. 3.29 Tab. 3.30 Tab. 3.31 Tab. 3.32 Tab. 3.33 Tab. 3.34 Tab. 3.35 Tab. 3.36 Tab. 3.37 Tab. 3.38 Tab. 3.39 Tab. 4.1 Tab. 4.2 Tab. 5.1 Tab. 5.2 Tab. 5.3 Tab. 5.4 Tab. 5.5 Tab. 5.6 Tab. 5.7 Tab. 5.8 Tab. 5.9 Tab. 5.10 Tab. 5.11 Tab. 5.12 Tab. 6.1 1+0 frame - P/N and flanges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19 1+1 frame - Attenuation, type of flange and P/N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24 Elliptical waveguide (31263-XXX): composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43 Connectors and accessories (31263-778SR): composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43 Elliptical waveguide (31263-750): composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.44 Connectors and accessories (31263-778SR): composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.44 Elliptical waveguide (31263-758): composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.45 Connectors and accessories (31263-779SR): composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.45 Elliptical waveguide (31263-YYY): composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.46 Connectors and accessories (31263-YYYSR): composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.46 Elliptical waveguide (31263-762): composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.47 Connectors and accessories (31263-796SR): composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.47 Elliptical waveguide (31263-766): composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.48 Connectors and accessories (31263-796SR): composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.48 155 Mbit/s Electrical Tributary Coaxial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.63 STM-1 Optical Tributary Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.63 WST 2 Mbit/s Coaxial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.64 Alarms Connector (IDU assembly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.65 LCT (RS 232) Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.66 V.11 channel connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.67 G.703 channel connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.67 Connection elements for 1+0 system (P/N 597-525/21). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.68 Connection elements for 1+1/2+0 system (P/N 597-525/22) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.69 Connection elements for upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 (P/N 597-525/33) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.69 155 Mbit/s Electrical Tributary Coaxial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.74 STM-1 Optical Tributary Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.74 Alarms Connector (IDU assembly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.75 LCT (RS 232) Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.77 V.11 channel connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.78 G.703 channel connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.78 Connection elements for 1+0 system (P/N 597-526/77). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.79 Connection elements for 1+0 system (P/N 597-526/78). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.80 ANDREW set (a). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88 INTERCOND set (a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88 Andrew set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.89 KEY alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Station accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 List of spare parts - IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 7 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 8 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 10 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 11 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 13 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 6 GHz (6L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 6 GHz (6U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 7 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 8 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 11 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 13 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 Summary of the front panel LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19

LIST OF TABLES

LA
PA G E
1 - PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
1 PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
1.1 FOREWORD
1.1.1 Object of the present manual
This User Manual (UMN) gives the information necessary for the installation, the commissioning and the ordinary maintenance of the SRA 4 - STM-1 Access SDH Radio System equipment in the RF band: 6, 7, 8, 10, 11 and 13 GHz.
1.1.2
Contents of the user manual (UMN)

The manual has been drawn up according to "Code of Practice" recommendations for the writing out of instruction technical manuals, published under the support of U.E.R (European Broadcast Union). The manual consists of the following sections: Section 1: PRELIMINARY INFORMATION It contains the rules and precautionary measures to be adopted by the users of electronic equipment as well as general nature information relevant to the synchronous hierarchy. Section 2: PLANNING MANUAL It contains general information about the equipment, its electrical characteristics and its use with a telecommunication network. Section 3: INSTALLATION MANUAL All the instructions are set down for the equipment mechanical installation, complete of the constituting parts, and of the electrical connections to the outside. Section 4: ACTIVATION MANUAL The presetting to be performed on the equipment, if required, are described, its activation and the check and recommended setting up measurements to ensure the correct operation. Section 5: MAINTENANCE MANUAL It includes troubleshooting action, if required, useful to locate the faulty part using the signalings and alarms available on the equipment front panel. It also includes the list of the spare parts which can be delivered with the equipment and the instructions for the faulty part replacement. Section 6: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS It includes the description of the equipment part operation referred to the relevant block diagrams.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN 911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006 1-1

In addition to the present User Manual (UMN) the OPERATOR MANUAL (OMN) is available, that contains the operational guide for use of the control software developped for the management, by local terminal, of the alarms and the presetting relevant to the equipment, in addition to the restitution of the analogue measurements, of the indications and configuration displayings of the radio system.
1.2 SAFETY RULES AND USE PRECAUTIONS

This paragraph contents all the safety rules and the use precautions to be followed during operations on the equipment to avoid injuries to personnel and/or damages to the equipment components.
1.2.1
Safety rules
The equipment complies with the 1999/5/EC European specification. The equipment is prearranged for supplying from station batteries (-48 to -60 VDC 20%); then follow the on force specifications for low voltage supplied equipment's.
1.2.1.1
Optical safety
The EQUIPMENT contains only class 1 laser component according to IEC 60825-1.

1-2 SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN 911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006

1.2.1.1.1 Warnings for the optical safety
The optical source used into the subject equipment has been classified by the manufacturer as 1 class laser according to EN 60825-1/IEC 60825-1. This class of laser is: "Lasers that are safe under reasonably foreseeable conditions of operation, including the use of optical instruments for intrabeam viewing." The following rules can be followed to increase the safety level: Do not point to the eyes a broken fiber or an incomplete one or an optical connector not covered. If the optical source is not surely switched off, do not directly or for reflection stare (particularly using lenses or by means of a microscope) at a broken fiber or at an incomplete one or at an optical connector not covered. Handle carefully the optical fiber. A broken optical fiber can cause damages to eyes and skin. Check that the optical source is switched off before execute or interrupt an optical connection. Do not connect a fiber to an optical output without checking that the fiber terminal is ended. Do not supply the optical tributary out of the sub-rack and do not change the factory settings and adjustments.
1.2.1.2
Electrical safety
The equipment complies with the Safety Norms CEI EN 60950-1. The equipment must be installed, started up, managed and repaired only by properly trained personnel. Before supplying the equipment, it is necessary to complete the wiring of the connections to the protection ground, the insertion of all the units and/or modules provided for the requested configuration and also the connection of all the necessary connectors. The connection to the protection ground must not be removed or damaged.


1.2.1.3 Waste equipment management
The radio equipment at the end of its life can be classified as 16 02 14 equipment out of use different from the equipment listed in 16 02 09 to 16 02 13 according to the dangerous waste list determined in article 1 para. 4 of Government Recc. 91/689/EEC on the dangerous waste updated in Recc. 2001/118/EC.
INFORMATION TO USER (FOR ITALIAN MARKET ONLY) According to the art. 13 of the legislative decree, D.Lgs nr. 151 of the 25th of july 2005. "adopting directives 2002/95/CE, 2002/96/CE e 2003/108/CE, releted on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment, and on disposal of electrical and electronic waste". The crossed-out bin symbol on equipment, means that the product, at the end of its useful life, must be disposed separately from the municipal waste. User should return it to the municipalities collection system or to the ratailers if you buy a new equivalent product. Differentiated waste of old appliances will result in recycling, treatment and environmental compatible disposal, which will help to prevent potential negative consequences on the environment and human health and consequently the reuse of renewable raw material The misdemenour of the disposal will lead to financial penalties as defined in artt. 50 onwards, of the legislative decree nr. 22 of the 5th of february 1997.
The equipment does not include: Cadmium Mercury Asbestos Radioactive materials PCB Berillium


1.2.1.4 External operations
Some other operations involving danger conditions are the ones executed outside during the equipment installation and starting up phase. During the execution of such operations, it is necessary to follow strictly the safety rules listed here below: During installation, while the antenna and/or the external supporting-frame for rod are lifted, it is strictly forbidden to stay or to pass in the underlying area. Such an area must be properly restricted or signalled according to the on force rules. For the external operations to be executed on the antenna, on the frame and on the ODU, all the necessary safety rules against accidental fallings of the operators must be respected, according to the on force rules. For example, it is necessary to use protection fences and belts. During the equipment starting up phase, the operators must not be in front of the antenna.
If one of the above mentioned safety rules is not respected, some injuries to the personnel can be caused.


1.2.2 ESDS precautions
The ESDS (Electro Static Discharge Sensitive) electronic devices can be partially or permanently damaged by the static electricity that is commonly present in the operating environment. The main ESDS devices are: CMOS components Large Scale Integration components in MOS technology SAW (Surface Acoustic Wave) components Operational amplifiers with MOS/FET inputs MOS/FET components and arrays
Microwave semiconductors and microcircuits at frequencies > 1 GHz Modules containing ESDS devices are identified by following adhesive labels:
In order avoid any damage while handling the modules, the user should wear an antistatic elastic bracelet, grounded by means a spiral cord. Those modules that are mounted on the equipment (faulty or spare parts) shall be stores in their original antistatic package marked by the labels above shown.

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 1.3 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
ADC ADM AGC AIS ANSI AP ASIC ATDE ATM ATPC AU AUOH AUG AU-PTR BB BCM BER BIP B-ISDN CC CCIR CCITT CTR DAC DCC DCCR DCCM DCN DFM DLC DLS DRF DRO DSP DTE DTI DXC ECC Analog to Digital Converter Add/Drop Multiplex Automatic Gain Control Alarm Indication Signal American National Standard Institute Alternate Polarization Application Specific Integrate Circuit Adaptive Time Domain Equalizer Asynchronous Transfer Mode Automatic Transmit Power Control Administrative Unit Administrative Unit Overhead Administrative Unit Group Administrative Unit Pointer Base Band Block Coded Modulation Bit Error Ratio Bit Interleaved Parity Broadband Integrated Services Digital Network Co-Channel Comit Consultatif International des Radiocomunications Comit Consultatif International Telgraphique et Tlphonique Complesso Trasmettitore Ricevitore (Transceiver equipment) Digital to Analog Converter Data Communications Channel Data Communications Channel (Repeater section) Data Communications Channel.(Multiplexer section) Data Communication Network Dispersive Fade Margin Digital Loop Carrier Data Link Service Dielectric Resonator Filter Dielectric Resonator Oscillator Digital Signal Processing Data Terminal Equipment Double Tributary Interface Digital cross-connect Embedded Control Channel


EOC EOW ETSI FAL FDM FEBE FEC FERF FIR HCDR HDLC HOVC HPA HPA HPC HPT HUG IEEE ISC ISDN ISO ITU-R ITU-T LAN LCN LO LOF LOM LOP LOS LOVC LPA LPC LPT LT LTE MAN MCF MD MF Embedded Operations Channel Engineering Order Wire European Telecommunication Standards Institute Frame Alignment Loss Frequency Division Multiplexing Far End Block Error Forward Error Control Far End Receive Failure Finite Impulse Response filter High Capacity Digital Radio High-Level Data Link Control Higher Order Virtual Container Higher order Path Adaption High Power Amplifier Higher order Path Connection Higher order Path Termination Higher order Unit Group Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers International Switching Center Integrated Services Digital Network International Organization for Standardization International Telecom Union - Radio International Telecom Union - Transmission Local Area Network Local Communication Network Local Oscillator Loss Of Frame Loss Of Multiframe Loss Of Pointer Loss Of Signal Lower Order Virtual Container Lower order Path Adaption Lower order Path Connection Lower order Path Termination Line Terminal Line Terminal Equipment Metropolitan Area Network Message Communication Function Mediation Device Mediation Function


MS MSOH MSP MST MTS MW NB NE NEF NRZ OH OHA OL OLC OLI OOF PABX PCM PDH PI PIOP PLL POH QAM RDI REI RF RPI RPS RS RSOH RST RT SA SC-DRO SCS SDH SEMF SMD SMN Multiplex Section Multiplex Section Overhead Multiplex Section Protection Multiplex Section Termination Multiplex Timing Source Microwave Narrow Band Network Element Network Element Function Non Return to Zero Overhead Overhead Access Oscillatore Locale (Local oscillator) Optical Loop Carrier Optical Line Interface Out Of Frame Private Automatic Branch Exchange Pulse Code Modulation Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Phisical Interface Parallel Input Output Port Phase Locked Loop Path Overhead Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Remote Defect Indication Remote Error Indication Radio Frequency Radio Phisical Interface Radio Protection Switching Regenerator Section Regenerator Section Overhead Regenerator Section Termination Ricevitore Trasmettitore (Transceiver) Section Adaptation Self Converting DRO Switching Control Signal Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Synchronous Equipment Management Function Surface Mounted Device SDH Management Network


SMS SOH SONET SPI SPS SSPA STI STM STM-N SW TCM TMN TU TUG VC VCO WB WES WST SDH Management Subnetwork Section Overhead Synchronous Optical Network SDH Physical Interface Synchronus protection switching Solid State Power Amplifier Single Tributary Interface Synchronous Transport Module Synchronous Transport Module (level) N Switching Trellis Code Modulation Telecommunications Management Network Tributary Unit Tributary Unit Group Virtual Container Voltage Controlled Oscillator Wide Band Weighted Evaluation Strategy Way Side Traffic

2 - PLANNING
2 PLANNING
2.1 GENERAL INFORMATION
SRA 4 is a Point to Point Broadband Wireless System adopting an Indoor-Outdoor architecture at 6L GHz, 6U GHz, 7 GHz, 8 GHz, 10 GHz, 11 GHz and 13 GHz with 128 TCM - 4D or 64 TCM-4D band with SDH interfaces fitting recommended radio channel arrangements listed in par. 2.1.1. Ease and speed of link set-up, broadband availability and fiber quality, SRA 4 is the most reliable and convenient solution for a wide range of applications such as: SDH and traditional ATM transport networks; LMDS, BWA networks; UMTS/GSM cellular infrastructure networks. SDH (STM-1)
The radio system SRA 4 has been designed to transmit the following signals: The frame structure of the transmitted signal has the 155.520 Mbit/s bit rate with 128 TCM - 4D or 64 TCM-4D modulation. With the 128 TCM-4D modulation the spacing for the 1xSTM-1 is 28 MHz. With the 64 TCM-4D modulation the spacing for the 1xSTM-1 is 40 MHz. The SRA 4 is available with two types of ODU: WB ODU (Wide Band) NB ODU (Narrow Band) By means of the LCT the WB ODU can be frequency-shifted into a sub-band of the RF band, while the NB ODU's are tuned to a specific RF channel and cannot be frequency shifted by the LCT. The WB ODU's are described in this manual. The NB ODU's are described in the SRA 4 manual P/N 911-387/02C0000. The WB ODU is supplied in two versions : ODU AP for AP channelling only ODU AP/CC for AP or CC channelling.
The SRA 4 is available with two types of IDU: SRA4 IDU SRA4 IDU-STM1

2 - PLANNING

2.1.1 RF channeling
Tab. 2.1, Tab. 2.2, Tab. 2.3, Tab. 2.4, Tab. 2.5 and Tab. 2.6 show the frequency bands (according to the RF channeling) of the radio digital system SRA 4. Tab. 2.1 RF 6 GHz channelling Frequency bands (MHz) 5925 - 6425 (6L) 6430 - 7110 (6U) Co/cross-polar adjacent channel spacing (MHz) 29.65 40 Centre gap (MHz) Shifter Freq. (MHz) 252.04 340
Recommendation
ITU-R F.383-7 ITU-R F.384-7
44.49 60
Tab. 2.2
RF 7 GHz channelling Frequency bands (MHz) 7110-7750 (lower) 7110-7750 (upper) 7125-7425 7425-7900 7425-7725 7425-7725 7125-7425 Co/cross-polar adjacent channel spacing (MHz) 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 Centre gap (MHz) Shifter Freq. (MHz) 196 168 161 245 154 161 168
Recommendation
ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 3 ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 3 ITU-R F.385-6 (F0=7275) ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 4 ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 1 ITU-R F.385-6 (F0=7575) Custom (Finland)
84 copolar 56 copolar depending on channels used 49 copolar 42 copolar depending on channels used 56 copolar

2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.3 RF 8 GHz channelling Frequency bands (MHz) 7725-8275 7900-8400 (8U) 8200-8500 8200-8500 Co/cross-polar adjacent channel spacing (MHz) 29.65 28 46.648 28 Centre gap (MHz) 103.77 crosspolar 70 crosspolar 58.32 copolar 49 crosspolar Shifter Freq. (MHz) 311.32 266 151.614 119
Recommendation
ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 1 OIRT/ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 4 ITU-R F.386-6 ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 3
Tab. 2.4
RF 10 GHz channelling Frequency bands (MHz) 10000-10680 Co/cross-polar adjacent channel spacing (MHz) 28 Centre gap (MHz) 98 Shifter Freq. (MHz) 350
Recommendation
CEPT.Rec.12-05
Tab. 2.5
RF 11 GHz channelling Frequency bands (MHz) 10700-11700 10700-11700 10700-11700 Recommendation ITU-R F.387 Recommends 1 ITU-R F.387 Annex 1 ITU-R F.387 Annex 2 Co/cross-polar adjacent channel spacing (MHz) 40 40 40 Centre gap (MHz) 90 crosspolar 130 crosspolar 50 crosspolar Shifter Freq. (MHz) 530 530 490
Tab. 2.6
RF 13 GHz channelling Frequency bands (MHz) 12750-13750 Recommendation Co/cross-polar adjacent channel spacing (MHz) 28 Centre gap (MHz) 70 crosspolar Shifter Freq. (MHz) 266
ITU-R F.497-6

2 - PLANNING

2.1.2 System types
There are 11 base configurations, identified by a number called System Type; the controller on the IDU configures the whole equipment according to this value. The available base system types are listed in the following Tab. 2.7. Tab. 2.7 Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Base System Types Description 1+0 Terminal without Multiplex Section Termination (MST) (note 1) 1+1 Frequency Diversity Terminal without MST (with Single Tributary Interface)(note 1) 1+1 Hot Stand-by (HSBY) Terminal without MST (with Single Tributary Interface) (note 1) 1+1 Frequency Diversity Terminal without MST (with Double Tributary Interface) (note 2) 1+1 Hot Stand-by (HSBY) Terminal without MST (with Double Tributary Interface) (note 2) 2+0 Terminal without MST (note 1) 2x(1+1) Frequency Diversity Terminal without MST (with Single Tributary Interface) (note 2) 2x(1+1) Frequency Diversity Terminal without MST (with Double Tributary Interface) (note 2) 2x(1+1) Hot Stand-by (HSBY) Terminal without MST (with Single Tributary Interface)(note 2) 2x(1+1) Hot Stand-by (HSBY) Terminal without MST (with Double Tributary Interface) (note 2) N+1 Terminal without MST (with Single Tributary Interface) (note 2) Note 1: Configuration with SRA4 IDU and SRA4 IDU-STM1. Note 2: Configuration with SRA4 IDU only. SRA 4 radio equipment is built up by: 1. 2. 3. one indoor shelf (IDU, indoor unit), providing the base band; one or two outdoor equipment (ODU, outdoor unit), containing RF devices, connected with the IDU through an IF (Intermediate Frequency) cable. one optional external EOW assembly Channeling AP AP AP AP AP AP or CC CC CC CC CC AP
The configurations of the indoor shelf and the control programs of the slave cards are different according to the selected system type and configuration.
The optional "EXTERNAL EOW" assembly, which functionalities, is described in the relevant UMN manual
provides
the
EOW

2 - PLANNING

2.1.3 Technology
System design is based on the use of the most advanced technologies and a big effort has been made to transfer complexity from analog to digital hardware to take advantage of customised integration (ASlCs) and to improve system reliability. The biggest and most sophisticated ASIC designed for communication systems is the heart of SRA 4 modem. System design is based on a full digital concept. This approach takes extensive advantage of the most recent technological achievements leading to VLSI circuit solutions, the most suitable for managing digital signals. In addition, this approach ensures a very high manufacturing quality, with an extremely reliable performance.
2.1.4
Modulation type
The SRA 4 adopts 128 TCM-4D or 64 TCM-4D with Reed Solomon concatenated coding modulation. The major benefit of this modulation format is a strongly enhanced error correction capability and bit error rate performance if compared with conventional QAM systems. A very powerful data interleaving scatters the errors to reach an even, fiber-like error distribution while maintaining a minimal system delay. A powerful equaliser adapts the equalisation algorithm to the communication channel parameters. Blind or decision aided adaptive equalisation are run with the best performances at any channel condition. 64 or 128 TCM-4D with Reed Solomon concatenated coding, a powerful pointer protection together with tailored interleavers, makes an excellent bearer for traffic requiring errorless transmission media.
2.1.5
System building blocks

The engineering of the SRA 4 digital radio system is characterized by the high operating frequency. For this reason, in order to minimize the feeder loss an indoor/outdoor split configuration has been choosen. The indoor part consists of a rack ETSI and one IDU. The IDU, with base band units and modem, is connected by means of single coaxial IF cable to a very compact outdoor transceiver located close to the antenna (see Fig. 2.1). Two types of ODU are available: AP and AP/CC. The first type (AP) is available within the 7, 8, 10, 11 and 13 GHz bands for AP channelling and implements waveguide-connections (RF) towards the antenna and cable-connections (IF) towards the IDU. The second type (AP/CC) is available within the 6L, 6U, 7, 8, 11 and 13 GHz bands for the AP or CC channelling, and implements for the AP configurations RF waveguide-connections towards the antenna, and cable-connections (IF) towards the IDU; connections between the two ODUs are also implemented for the CC configurations.

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.1 SRA 4 Equipment
FLEXIBLE WAVE GUIDE
ODU SUPPORT
ODU COAXIAL CABLE
FIXING ON THE RACK OF COAXIAL CABLE IDU
External EOW (OPTIONAL)
ETSI RACK (19)

2 - PLANNING

2.1.5.1 Indoor section
Two versions of the IDU are available: SRA4 IDU: Main Capabilities: Bit Rate: 1 or 2xSMT-1 Supported system types: 1+0 / 1+1 FD STI / 1+1 FD DTI / 1+1 HSBY STI / 1+1 HSBY DTI / 2+0 STI-DTI-CC WB/ 2x(1+1) FD STI / 2x(1+1) FD DTI / 2x(1+1) HSBY STI / 2x(1+1) HSBY DTI / N+1 STI 2 Mb/s WST V11, G703 64 Kbits/s services Co-Channel /X-PIC WB and NB ODU supported SRA4 IDU-STM1: Main Capabilities: Bit Rate: 1xSMT-1 Supported system types: 1+0 / 1+1 FD STI / 1+1 HSBY STI / 2+0 STI V11, G703 64 Kbits/s services WB ODU supported
2.1.5.1.1 1+0/2+0/1+1 configuration (SRA4 IDU and SRA4 IDU-STM1)

The indoor section consists of one IDU. The IDU consists of baseband interfaces for data and management, two BB/Modem units, a Controller unit, an Alarm Restitution Unit and a Fan unit. A single coaxial IF cable connecting the BB/Modem unit with a very compact outdoor transceiver located close to the antenna. An unprotected 1+0 system consists of one assembly equipped with only one BB/Modem unit; a 1+1/2+0 system consists of an assembly equipped with two BB/Modem units (refer Fig. 2.2 for SRA4 IDU and Fig. 2.3 for SRA4 IDU-STM1 ). Each BB/Modem unit is connected to the outdoor unit through a single coaxial cable where main signal, indoor-outdoor service data and outdoor power supply are sent together. The indoor unit is totally independent of the RF band chosen for the outdoor unit, making the system very flexible and easy to deploy. The SOH bytes can be used to transmit two 64 kbit/s service channels and a 2 Mbit/s WST. The STM-1 interface can be either electrical or optical. Fig. 2.6 shows the 1+0 block diagram of the SRA4 IDU. Fig. 2.7 shows the 1+0 block diagram of the SRA4 IDU-STM1.

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.2 IDU in 1+0 and 1+1/2+0 configurations (SRA4 IDU)
1+0 CONFIGURATION ALARM RESTITUTION Unit
CHACHB Alarms IDU PWR I O
BB-MODEM 1 Unit
ODU ALM STM-1 #2 Out In CABLE ALM CO-CH Out ODU PWR I O IF
Key
U n. F A N
U S E R
WST V11 G703 In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
Exp. Port In
PS
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
CONTROLLER Unit
1+1/2+0 CONFIGURATION ALARM RESTITUTION Unit

CHACHB Alarms IDU Key I O
BB-MODEM 1 Unit
U n. F A N
ODU ALM CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR ALM I O In Out Exp. Port IF
U V11 S E R
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
PS IF
CHACHB
U V11 S E R
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR O ALM In Out I Exp. Port D
PS
CONTROLLER Unit
BB-MODEM 2 Unit

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.3 IDU in 1+0 and 1+1/2+0 configurations (SRA4 IDU-STM1)
1+0 CONFIGURATION ALARM RESTITUTION Unit BB-MODEM 1 Unit
CONTROLLER Unit
1+1/2+0 CONFIGURATION ALARM RESTITUTION Unit BB-MODEM 1 Unit
CONTROLLER Unit
BB-MODEM 2 Unit

2 - PLANNING

2.1.5.1.2 2x(1+1) configuration (SRA4 IDU)
The indoor section consists of two IDUs. Fig. 2.4 shows the 2x(1+1) system. The 2x(1+1) system consists of two IDU subracks and of four BB/Modem units. Fig. 2.4 IDU in 2x(1+1) configuration
ALARM RESTITUTION Unit (1) BB-MODEM (1-1) unit see Tab. 2.8 IDU Pol. V(H)
CONTROLLER Unit (1)

CHA CHB Alarms IDU Key I O
U n. F A N
(1)
U V11 S E R
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
CABLE ALM Exp. Port
In Out
CO-CH ODU PWR I O
IF
PS IF
CHA CHB
U V11 S E R
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
PS
BB-MODEM (1-2) unit see Tab. 2.8 BB-MODEM (2-1) unit see Tab. 2.8
U n. F A N
(2)
U V11 S E R
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
CABLE ALM Exp. Port
In Out
CO-CH ODU PWR I O
IF
PS IF
CHA CHB
U V11 G703 S E R
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
PS
ALARM RESTITUTION Unit (2)
BB-MODEM (2-2) unit see Tab. 2.8 CONTROLLER Unit (2)
IDU Pol.H(V)
Tab. 2.8
BB-MODEM unit association in 2x(1+1) configurations Configuration 2x(1+1)FD 2x(1+1) HotStby BB-Modem (1-1) CH1 V(H)-pol Main V(H)-pol BB-Modem (1-2) CH2 V(H)-pol Stby V(H)-pol BB-Modem (2-1) CH1 H(V)-pol Main H(V)-pol BB-Modem (2-2) CH2 H(V)-pol Stby H(V)-pol

2 - PLANNING

2.1.5.1.3 N+1 configuration (SRA4 IDU)
The indoor section consists of two IDUs. Fig. 2.5 shows a 2+1 and 3+1 protected system. System 2+1 consists of two IDU subracks and of three BB/Modem units. The 3+1 system consists of two IDU subracks and of four BB/Modem units. Fig. 2.5 IDU in N+1 configuration
2+1 CONFIGURATION
ALARM RESTITUTION Unit (1)
BB-MODEM STBY Unit
IDU MAIN
U n. F A N
(1)
U V11 S E R
WST G703 In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR ALM I O In Out Exp. Port
IF
PS IF
CONTROLLER Unit (1) ALARM RESTITUTION Unit (2)
CHACHB
U V11 G703 S E R
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
PS
BBMODEM F1 unit BBMODEM F2 unit
Key
U n. F A N (2)
U S E R
WST V11 G703 In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
ODU ALM STM-1 #2 Out In
CABLE ALM
CO-CH Out
ODU PWR I O
IF
Exp. Port In
PS
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
CONTROLLER Unit (2)
IDU EXT
3+1 CONFIGURATION ALARM RESTITUTION Unit (1)
BB-MODEM STBY Unit
IDU MAIN
U n. F A N
(1)
CONTROLLER Unit (1) ALARM RESTITUTION Unit (2)
U V11 S E R
WST G703 In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
IF
PS IF
CHACHB
U V11 S E R
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU PWR ODU CABLE CO-CH O ALM In Out I ALM Exp. Port D
PS
BBMODEM F1 unit BBMODEM F2 unit BBMODEM F3 unit
U n. F A N
U V11 S E R
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
IF
PS IF
CHACHB
U V11 S E R
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
(2)
PS
CONTROLLER Unit (2)
IDU EXT

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.6 Indoor Section Block Diagram (SRA4 IDU)
2 Mbit/s Wayside 64 kbit/s V.11/G.703 1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1
WS Interface
WS processing From the second BB/MODEM unit
BB/MODEM UNIT
Data Interface
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
A1 A2
Switch A Modulator
DCC
DCC
IF, FSK, DC Interface ODU
ODU
1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1 64 kbit/s V.11/G.703
DCC, S23 SDH Interface T-RSOH L-RSOH
Switch B
B1 B2 From the second BB/MODEM unit
Demodulator
Data Interface WS Interface WS processing
2 Mbit/s Wayside
Power supply
DCC
DCC
F Interface Q Interface Alarms input/output LED
E2 EPROM Key
CONTROLLER UNIT
E2 EPROM Flash RAM

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.7 Indoor Section Block Diagram (SRA4 IDU-STM1)
BB/MODEM UNIT
64 kbit/s V.11/G.703 Data Interface From the second BB/MODEM unit Switch A Modulator
1xSTM-1
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
A1 A2
DCC
DCC
ODU
DCC, S23 1xSTM-1 64 kbit/s V.11/G.703 SDH Interface T-RSOH L-RSOH
Switch B
B1 B2 From the second BB/MODEM unit
Demodulator
Data Interface
Power supply
DCC
DCC
F Interface Q Interface Alarms input/output LED
E2 EPROM Key
CONTROLLER UNIT
E2 EPROM Flash RAM
2.1.5.2
Outdoor section
2.1.5.2.1 AP ODU (Transceiver for AP channelling)

Reference to the block diagram of Fig. 2.8. The conventional block lay-out of the transceiver exploits a high degree of circuit and function integration. Also for this part of the system high level technological solutions have been adopted to reach the system objectives. Being the outdoor transceiver connected to the internal terminating unit by means of a single coaxial cable, it is necessary to have an overvoltage protection circuit and an IF diplexer in order to separate the Tx and Rx modulated carriers. The in/out connecting cable is also used for the supply of battery D. C. voltage(-48V) to the transceiver and for the transmission of service subcarriers for message communication (alarms, received field, etc.) between the indoor and outdoor units. The ODU unit is equipped by the following subunits:

2 - PLANNING

Power supply unit: Converts the DC voltage to the voltages required by other subunits, provides alarm for failures, extracts the DC voltage from the cable and ensures the primary lightning protection; IF unit: is a transversal subunit; it includes IF duplexer, dual IF processing, dual PLL circuit, IDU/ODU communication channel, ODU hardware controller. Here a triplexer addresses the IF and FSK signals respectively to the IF sections and the FSK subcarriers toward the modem. The Tx IF (350 MHz) is up-converted to 1690 MHz, filtered and sent to the transmitter; the Rx IF, coming from the microwave receiver (2180 MHz), is down-converter to 140 MHz and sent to the IDU. The IF unit houses also the cable equalizer, a couple of PLL circuit, a frequency reference oscillator. Microwave Transceiver Front-End (MWTF): designed to cover the complete RF band; it includes the microwave transmitter, receiver and VCOs. Dual UHF VCO: is a part of the synthesizer used to synchronize the RF VCOs. It is mounted on the mechanical absorber in order to avoid short-term frequency skips. Filter duplexer: ensures the tunability in a quarter of the RF band.
Each transceiver is installed in a waterproof housing. The ODU housing does not need to be open, requiring simple and easy operations during installation/maintenance and test phases. Fig. 2.8 Outdoor Section Block diagram (ODU for AP channelling)
350 MHz
Power Supply IF Cable 50 ohm 140 MHz Overvoltage protection DUAL VCO IF unit
DIPLEXER MWTF

2 - PLANNING

2.1.5.2.2 AP/CC ODU (Transceiver for AP or CC channelling)
Reference to the block diagram of Fig. 2.9. The conventional block lay-out of the transceiver exploits a high degree of circuit and function integration. Also for this part of the system high level technological solutions have been adopted to reach the system objectives. Being the outdoor transceiver connected to the internal terminating unit by means of a single coaxial cable, it is necessary to have an overvoltage protection circuit and an IF diplexer in order to separate the Tx and Rx modulated carriers. The in/out connecting cable is also used for the supply of battery D. C. voltage(-48V) to the transceiver and for the transmission of service subcarriers for message communication (alarms, received field, etc.) between the indoor and outdoor units. With CC operations the two ODU's must be synchronized in Rx. This synchronisation is established through 2 coaxial cables situated between the two ODU's. Two synchronisms flow on the 2 cables, i.e., the first Rx conversion (from RF frequency to 2180 MHz) and the second Rx conversion (from 2180 MHz to 140 MHz). In the 6 GHz ODU only one conversion (from RF to 140 MHz) is present. With regard to CC operation, one of the two ODU's must be software-preset to Master (generates synchronisms) and the other ODU operating as Slave (receives the synchronisms from the ODU Master). The ODU unit is equipped by the following subunits: Power supply unit: Converts the DC voltage to the voltages required by other subunits, provides alarm for failures, extracts the DC voltage from the cable and ensures the primary lightning protection; IF unit: is a transversal subunit; it includes IF duplexer, dual IF processing, dual PLL circuit, IDU/ODU communication channel, ODU hardware controller. Here a triplexer addresses the IF and FSK signals respectively to the IF sections and the FSK subcarriers toward the modem. The Tx IF (350 MHz) is up-converted to 1690 MHz, filtered and sent to the transmitter; the Rx IF, coming from the microwave receiver (2180 MHz), is down-converted to 140 MHz and sent to the IDU. The IF unit houses also the cable equalizer, a couple of PLL circuit, a frequency reference oscillator. Microwave Transceiver Front-End (MWTF): designed to cover the complete RF band; it includes the microwave transmitter, receiver and VCOs. Dual UHF VCO: is a part of the synthesizer used to synchronize the RF VCOs. It is mounted on the mechanical absorber in order to avoid short-term frequency skips. Filter duplexer: ensures the tunability in a quarter of the RF band.
Each transceiver is installed in a waterproof housing. The ODU housing does not need to be open, requiring simple and easy operations during installation/maintenance and test phases.

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.9 Outdoor Section Block diagram (ODU for AP/CC channelling
To/from other ODU
VCO 2nd Rx Conversion
140 MHz IF Cable 50 ohm

350 MHz
140 MHz
Power Supply Overvoltage protection
Down Converter
2180 MHz
350 MHz
RF DUAL VCO Tx VCO Rx VCO
To/from other ODU
With regard to AP operation switch 1 is closed and switches 2-3-4 are open. With regard to CC operation switches 1-2-4 on the ODU Master are closed and switch 3 is open. On the ODU Slave, instead, switches 1 and 2 are open and 3-4 closed.

MWTF
IF Unit
DIPLEXER
1690 MHz Up Converter
2 - PLANNING

2.1.6 IDU-ODU interconnection
The IDU-ODU interconnection takes place through a single bi-directional line, carrying the aggregate signal (Tx/Rx radio signal, IDU/ODU auxiliary service channel and ODU power supply).
2.1.6.1
Radio signal
The IDU-ODU connection, regarding the radio signal transmission/reception, includes the IF signals: 350 MHz modulated signal to transmit the Tx signal (from IDU to ODU) 140 MHz modulated signal to transmit the Rx signal (from ODU to IDU). optimize the length, the attenuation and the size of the connection cable IDU-ODU minimize the filtering functions in IDU and ODU minimize the interferences between the Tx and Rx sections of the ODU minimize the interferences between the harmonics of the IF Tx frequency and the shifter frequencies obtain the dynamic interval necessary to AGC circuit in IDU and ODU.
By using frequencies 350 MHz and 140 MHz it is possible to:
2.1.6.2
IDU/ODU service auxiliary channel

An auxiliary channel connects IDU to ODU, carrying all the information for the correct operation of the equipment (alarms, data channel, speech channel, ect.). The IDU-ODU service connection takes place through two FSK-modulated sub-carriers, with 7 MHz and 10 MHz.
2.1.6.3
ODU power supply

The IDU-ODU interconnection cable is used also to carry the secondary DC voltage (-48 V) to supply the ODU. The DC voltage comes from the relevant BB+MODEM unit in the IDU. In this unit are also present the soft-start circuits, the current limitation circuits and the alarm circuits to generate the open cable alarm and the short-circuit on the cable alarm.

2 - PLANNING

2.1.7
2.1.7.1
System protection
1+1 protection
SRA 4 implements a very flexible and effecting switching platform. The switching system protects traffic from any possible anomalous conditions: HW faults Tributary and RF loss of signal CPU controller faults
The complete path from the source to the final destination can be effectively protected. SRA 4 provides the tributary protection. The same signal (Overhead and Payload) is available on both the tributary interfaces protecting the traffic even by possible tributary loss of signal. Hot Standby, Frequency Diversity with Single or Double tributary interface options allow users to implement their own protection requirements just selecting the most suitable system set-up. Fig. 2.10 shows the 1+1 configuration without the tributary protection (STI). Fig. 2.11 shows the 1+1 configuration with the tributary protection (DTI).
2.1.7.1.1 Switching criteria in the Tx Switch (Trib. Switch)

Tab. 2.9 Switching criteria in the Tx Switch (Trib. Switch) Switching Criteria Los Tx Lof Tx TIM Tx TX PLL clock RX PLL clock Ref clock Unrevertive Switch Type

2 - PLANNING

2.1.7.1.2 Switching criteria in the Rx Switch (Dem. Switch)
Type of Dem switching: Hitless/errors free Switching mode "Revertive / non revertive" (SW settable)
Tab. 2.10
Switching criteria in the Rx Switch (Dem. Switch) ALARM Demodulator Alarm RADIO LOF SDH LOF (in BB) BB Card Fail EXCESSIVE BER HIGH BER LOW BER PRIORITY 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 BER approx. in the range 10^-4 and 10^-6 BER approx. in the range 10^-7 and 10^-9 BER approx. in the range 10^-11 and 10^-13 Note Demodulator Alarm covers the entire HW RX chain LOF SDH in 1xSTM-1 case LOF SDH of each STM-1 in 2xSTM-1 case
In the revertive mode the main channel (with higher priority) is always selected not only if it has a better quality than the secondary channel (having a lower priority) but also if it has an equal one. In the unrevertive mode there isn't a real main channel, so when the protection channel is on line there is no switching when the main channel becomes normal again (and viceversa).
2.1.7.1.3 Switching criteria in the ODU Hot Stand-by Switch

Tab. 2.11 Switching criteria in the ODU Hot Stand-by Switch Switching Criteria Mod Fail IF Cable FSK_ALM _UP Odu TX ALM Odu PS Alm ODU uP ALM Unrevertive Switch Type

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.10 1+1 configuration system block diagram without tributary protection ( with SRA4 IDU and SRA4 IDU-STM1)
(*)
2 Mbit/s Wayside 64 kbit/s V.11/G.703 1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1 electrical/optical
WS Interface
WS processing
BB UNIT 1
Switch A Modulator A2
Data Interface A1
(**)
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
ODU
(**)
1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1 electrical/optical 64 kbit/s V.11/G.703
Switch B SDH Interface T-RSOH L-RSOH
B1 B2
Demodulator
(*)
2 Mbit/s Wayside
1+1 BASE BAND INTERCONNECTION
BB UNIT 2
SDH Interface T-RSOH L-RSOH A1 A2 Switch A Modulator
ODU
Switch B B1 SDH Interface T-RSOH L-RSOH B2
Demodulator
(*) Do not foreseen in SRA4 IDU-STM1. (**) 2xSTM1 do not foreseen in SRA4 IDU-STM1.

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.11 1+1 configuration system block diagram with tributary protection( with SRA4 IDU only)
2 Mbit/s Wayside 64 kbit/s V.11/G.703 1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1 electrical/optical
WS Interface
WS processing
BB UNIT 1
Switch A Modulator A2
Data Interface A1
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
ODU
1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1 electrical/optical 64 kbit/s V.11/G.703
Switch B SDH Interface T-RSOH L-RSOH
B1 B2
Demodulator
2 Mbit/s Wayside
BB UNIT 2
1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1 electrical/optical SDH Interface T-RSOH L-RSOH A1 A2 Switch A Modulator
ODU
1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1 electrical/optical
Switch B B1 SDH Interface T-RSOH L-RSOH B2
Demodulator

2 - PLANNING

2.1.7.2 N+1 protection (with SRA4 IDU only)
Two IDUs (MAIN and EXT) are required and they are interconnected with two different cables: E-link cable between the two controller cards and B-link cable between the upper BB-modem boards (physical board 1) of the two IDUs. 2+1 system configuration is equal to 3+1 system configuration, with the exception of the fourth BB-modem card (physical card 2 of IDU EXT), which is not equipped in 2+1 system type. BB-modem cards 1, 2 and 3 (corresponding respectively to physical card 2 of IDU 1, card 1 of IDU 2 and card 2 of IDU 2) support tributary signals and radio protected channel 1, 2 and 3 respectively. BB-modem card S (corresponding to card 1 of IDU 1) supports radio stand-by channel (protecting channel); "occasional" tributary signals (signals to be transmitted on the protecting channel when no protection requests are present) are not foreseen. Fig. 2.13 and Fig. 2.14 show a block diagram relevant to the Tx section and Rx section respectively. "Expansion" IDU controller card is mainly used for switching management purposes (RS controller functionality): it manages the radio alarms and the card fail alarms received from the NE controller; it exchanges messages (via SCS channels) with the peer RS Controller housed in the remote station and configures all the switches according to the switching priorities and configurations received from the NE controller (user configurations). "Expansion" IDU alarm restitution unit is not used. Physical channels used inside the NE to manage switching functionality in 3+1 system type are depicted in Fig. 2.12. The same channels are used in 2+1 system type, with the difference that BB-modem 3 is not equipped (corresponding channels are not supported and corresponding alarms are not managed). The protection channel may be used to protect, at the same time, different protected channels in the two directions (for example, channel 1 from the local station to the remote one and channel 3 from the remote station to the local one). Local RS Controller sends switching requirements to the remote one according to local alarms of the receiving sections, then the remote RS Controller can decide to use the protecting channel to transmit the requested tributary signal(s) according to the received requirements or not to use it according to its local alarms (more explanations are given in the following). The switching is of hitless type.

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.12 Physical channels used to manage switching functionality in 3+1 system type
alarms and commands Controller I 2C bus BB-modem S
BB-modem 1
alarms and commands
SCS 1
E-link SCS 1 SCS 2 SPI interrupt I 2C bus
B-link
BB-modem 2 alarms and commands CAF
RS controller
BB-modem 3
alarms and commands
2.1.7.2.1 NE Controller behaviour

The "main" IDU controller is the NE controller. It manages all the NE configurations and transmits the alarms to the EMS (Element Manager System). A specific behaviour is required in double IDU configurations as detailed in this paragraph. When a configuration change is required from LCT/EMS, it checks if the "expansion" IDU is involved: if it is not involved, it behaves like a NE controller of a single IDU based system type; if the "expansion" IDU is involved, it accepts the configuration only if the "expansion" controller accepts the configuration too.
Accepted configurations are saved both in controller's non volatile memory and into Configuration Memory key. NE Controller also verifies that switching configurations (priorities, forcing, and so on) can be accepted.

Expansion IDU
Main IDU
2 - PLANNING

2.1.7.2.2 BB Card Equipping and Configuration
It is possible to have different tributary interfaces (electrical and optical ones) for the different BB-modem cards equipping a NE. All the BB-modem cards must be configured with the same tributary capacity (STM-1 or 2xSTM-1) and with the same modulation format.
2.1.7.2.3 Auxiliary Channels

Every BB-modem card supporting a protected channel can support the following Auxiliary (also known as Service) Channels: one 2 Mb/s way-side channel; one 64 kbit/s user channel, with selectable interface (G.703 or V.11).
One byte only (F1 byte) is always available in STM-1 frame in N+1 system types, so just one 64 kbit/s user channel can be transmitted (per each BB-modem card).
2.1.7.2.4 RS Controller and Protection Switching

RS Controller is the main functionality performed by the "expansion" controller in N+1 system types; it has to manage all the switching criteria, according to configurations received from NE controller, local alarms and messages exchanged with the remote station using SCS channels (for redundancy two 64 kbit/s channels are used, they occupy S23 RSOH byte in STM1#1 of Channels 1 and 2). Switching requests are sent to the remote RS Controller according to the estimated quality of every single received radio channel and taking into account all the configurations (received RF signal quality forcing, etc., as explained in the following) and also software detected alarms (such as card fails), which are passed from the NE controller to the RS Controller via E-link. The decision for switching is always taken by the receiving side and also the forcing conditions in a specific network element are referred to the received channels. The transmitter side shall only actuate the requests of the remote station (and acknowledge the execution of the request). CAF: channel quality, local alarms and commands CAF (Control and Alarm Frame) is a communication channel that goes through all the BB-Modem cards (via back panel inside the same IDU and via B-Link between the two IDUs). This information is made available to the "expansion" controller via SPI bus. It carries alarms and commands related to N+1 switching functionality. Quality (alarm state related) levels of the received RF channels, from the highest quality to the lowest one, are: normal; early warning low (E_W_L) alarm active; early warning high (E_W_H) alarm active; high BER (H_BER) alarm active.

2 - PLANNING

This information is transmitted by each BB-modem card to the RS Controller using CAF. The protecting channel (from the remote station to the local one) will be occupied by the signal transmitted on the protected channel with the worst quality, if the protecting channel has a better quality than the selected protected channel. Other (local) information transmitted on the CAF are: out of Frame condition for each demodulated STM-1 signal (from BB to RS controller); major alarm for the transmitting section (one for each BB/modem-ODU chain; from BB to RS Controller); major alarm for the receiving section (one for each BB/modem-ODU chain; from BB to RS Controller); alarms related to the protection channel (from BB to RS Controller); delay compensation between the two data streams, from radio side to tributary side, for each hitless switch (from BB to RS Controller); detection of an AIS insertion from the remote station to the local station; commands for all the switches (from RS Controller to each BB).
Protection exclusion, protection forcing and priority A quality level can be forced via LCT for each channel and the selected quality has higher priority than the actual RF channel quality: in case of quality forcing, RS Controller replaces the actual measure with the forced quality level when selecting the radio channel to be protected and manual/test indication is activated. Each protected channel can be configured via LCT to not occupy the protecting channel. The RS Controller ignores the actual RF quality level of that protected channel when selecting the radio channel to be protected; manual/test indication is activated. The protection functionality itself can be disabled (RPS Locked command): N+1 system type becomes a N+0 system type. Each of the protected channels can be configured to occupy the protecting channel. The RS Controller ignores the quality levels of all the protected channels and requires the remote RS Controller to transmit the selected protected channel on the protecting radio channel; after the confirmation of the remote RS Controller, the local one will switch the Rx section of the selected channel on the data stream received from the stand-by channel. Manual/test indication is activated. Each of the protected channels can be configured to occupy the protecting channel when no quality-related alarms are active for any protected channel. The RS Controller requests to the remote RS Controller to transmit the selected protected channel on the protecting channel, but, after the confirmation of the remote RS Controller, the local one will keep on using, in the receiver section, the protected channel ignoring the protecting one. Two (or three) protected channels may activate the same quality level alarm at the same time or at different times. The following rules apply: if equal quality alarms are detected at the same time, the protecting channel will be requested for the protected channel with the lowest index (the index is equal to the corresponding logical BB-modem card index, i.e. 1, 2 and 3);

2 - PLANNING

a protected channel occupying the protecting one won't be switched back to the working one, if another protected channel with a lower index activates the same quality alarm later.
RPS Locked Mode In RPS (Radio Protection Switching) Locked mode the switching functionality is temporarily disabled. All received working channels are forced in normal state and no requests are sent to the remote RS Controller to require the transmission of a selected protected channel on the protecting channel. RS Controller enters the RPS Locked mode and transmits a message to the remote RS controller to make it aware of the situation in the following cases: command disabling the Radio Protection Switching functionality (RPS Locked command); receiving alarm active on both the SCS channels; Stand-By Channel is no longer able to support the switching functionality (software disconnection or any hardware alarm affecting the transmit section or the receive section); Channel 2 is no longer able to support the switching functionality (software disconnection or hardware fault affecting base band portion); B-link failure (detected via CAF).
RS Controller enters the RPS Locked mode if it receives a "RPS Locked" message from the remote RS Controller but, in this case, it does not transmit a message to the remote RS controller, otherwise a loop would arise (each station will keep on staying in RPS Locked mode because the remote one is in RPS Locked mode). RS Controller Frozen Mode If the NE Controller enters the Frozen mode, the RS controller is also controlled to enter the Frozen mode. When in Frozen mode, the RS Controller freezes the position of the switches in the receiving side and does not take into account any change in the radio alarm states. Configurations affecting the "quality function" of the channels is refused. Switching in transmission direction is still performed according to messages transmitted by the remote RS Controller. Frozen mode is usually entered as a consequent action of a failure detection.

2 - PLANNING

Messages on SCS channels Two 64 kbit/s channels are used at radio level to connect the two RS Controllers. Transmitted messages can be divided into two categories: urgent and non urgent. Urgent messages are the ones used to manage the switching: requests to transmit a specified protected channel signal on the protecting (stand-by) radio channel and confirmations that a protected channel is being transmitted on the protecting channel. These messages are transmitted on both the SCS channels and are repeated 5 times to have a higher probability that the remote RS Controller receives them. In case more urgent messages have to be transmitted, they are interleaved to reduce delays. Non urgent messages are cyclically and alternatively transmitted on the two channels. They are relevant to switching criteria and switching alarms of each channel, channels occupying the protecting channel, channel disabling (user's configuration or automatic internal decision due to failure), SCS alarms, CAF alarm and working condition of RS Controller (Frozen mode, RPS Locked). If no cyclical messages are received for 200 ms, SCS alarm is activated. Useless protection switching are avoided It is useless occupying a radio protecting channel with severely degraded tributary signal(s). Switching requests are not transmitted if on the remote station: LOS, LOF or TIM tributary alarm is present (on the corresponding BB-modem) when tributary capacity is configured as STM-1 (both alarms are seen as an out of frame alarm from the RS Controller via the CAF signal); LOS, LOF or TIM alarms are present on both tributary signals (on the corresponding BB-modem) when tributary capacity is configured as 2xSTM-1.
If LOS/LOF/TIM tributary side alarms are detected on BB-modem card i, a proper setting the 4 most significant bits of SOH S22 byte (the same used for ATPC messages) in the SDH frame of STM-1#1 signal transmitted to the remote station is performed. The remote RS Controller will be made aware of the condition and will not request the protection of this channel. Refusing a protection switching request It might happen that a protection switching request transmitted from the local RS Controller could not be accomplished by the remote RS Controller for some reason (faulty condition or something else). No message is foreseen to inform the peer RS Controller that a request has not been accomplished. Local RS Controller infers its request has not been accomplished if it doesn't receive an acknowledge message from the remote RS Controller within 200 ms.

2 - PLANNING

Switching sequence examples Let's consider a 3+1 system type in the following situation: no forcing configuration enabled (completely automatic switching); no quality alarm active on the received radio channels; each tributary signal obtained selecting the corresponding protected RF channel; protecting RF channel transporting channel 1.
In the following example, two switching sequences are analyzed, due to the activation of an "Early Warning Low" alarm on channel 3 (point A) and then of a "Early Warning High" alarm on channel 1 while E_W_L alarm is still active on channel 3 (point C). a) Early Warning Low alarm is activated by protected channel 3 demodulator and passed to local RS Controller via CAF signal. 1. 2. 3. Local RS Controller verifies there isn't any alarm affecting protecting channel. Local RS Controller transmits a request to the remote RS Controller (using both SCS channels) to transmit signal 3 also on the protecting channel. Remote RS Controller accomplishes the request of the local RS Controller and transmits to the local RS Controller (via SCS channels) the message stating channel 3 is transmitted also on the protecting channel. Local RS Controller verifies that delay compensation has been reached in receiving section switch 3, then it moves Rx switch 3 from protected channel 3 side to protection side.
4.
b)
Early Warning Low alarm is activated by protected channel 1 demodulator and passed to local RS Controller via CAF signal. Local RS Controller does not take any consequent action because the same quality level alarm is active on protected RF channel 3, and channel 3 is already occupying the protecting channel. Early Warning High alarm is activated by protected channel 1 demodulator and passed to local RS Controller via CAF signal. 1. Local RS Controller verifies quality related level of the protecting channel is better than the quality level of protected channel 1. It also verifies that the quality level of the protected channel 1 is currently worse than the quality level of the protected channel 3 (currently occupying the protecting channel). Local RS Controller verifies the delay alignment in Rx switch 3 and then moves it back on the protected channel 3. Local RS Controller transmits a request to the remote RS Controller (using both SCS channels) to transmit signal 1 also on the protecting channel. Remote RS Controller accomplishes the request of the local RS Controller and transmits to the local RS Controller (via SCS channels) the message stating channel 1 is transmitted also on the protecting channel. Local RS Controller verifies that delay compensation has been reached in receiving section switch 1, then it moves Rx switch 1 from protected side to protection side.
c)
2. 3. 4.
5.

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.13 N+1 (3+1) configuration system block diagram: Tx section
Tx Distributor
BB UNIT "1"
Modulator
Tx St.by
Not Used
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
ODU
Stand-by Channel - IDU Main
To Demodulator
2 Mbit/s Wayside
BB UNIT "2"
WS Interface WS Processing
Tx CH.1
64 kbit/s V.11/G.703 1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1 electrical/optical
Data Interface SDH Interface T-RSOH L-RSOH
Modulator IF, FSK, DC Interface ODU ODU
Channel 1 - IDU Main
To Demodulator
2 Mbit/s Wayside
BB UNIT "1"
Tx CH.2
Channel 2 - IDU Exp.
To Demodulator
2 Mbit/s Wayside
BB UNIT "2"
Tx CH.3
To Demodulator

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.14 N+1 (3+1) configuration system block diagram: Rx section
BB UNIT "1"
From Modulator
IF, FSK, DC Interface ODU Rx Distributor
ODU
Rx St.by
Not Used
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
Demodulator
Stand-by Channel - IDU Main BB UNIT "2"

From Modulator
IF, FSK, DC Interface ODU 1xSTM-1 o 2xSTM-1 electrical/optical SDH Interface T-RSOH L-RSOH
ODU
Demodulator
Rx CH.1
64 kbit/s V.11/G.703 2 Mbit/s Wayside
Data Interface WS Interface WS Processing
Channel 1 - IDU Main

From Modulator
BB UNIT "1"
ODU
Demodulator
Rx CH.2
BB UNIT "2"
From Modulator
ODU
Demodulator
Rx CH.3

2 - PLANNING

2.1.8 System maintenance
A wide range of pole mountings allows an easy ODU installation to cover any possible outdoor installation condition. Several mounting structures, holding one or more ODUs, are available for integrated or separated ODU Antenna connections. A Back-up Memory Key, plugged on the front panel of the Alarm Restitution unit in the IDU, contains all the configuration data. Once configured, the system writes all the set-up parameters on the Back-up Memory Key. SRA 4 has been designed to simplify as much as possible all the system-related operations, from installation to supervision, from upgrading to replacement of the units.
2.1.9
System power supply

The system, when 1+0/1+1/2+0 configured, consists of one IDU assembly plus one or two ODUs; while when 2+1/3+1 configured, it consists of two IDU assemblies and three or four ODUs. Each IDU assembly can be powered from any BB/Modem unit or from both through a battery voltage (-48V20%) delivered by the station. Protection to power inputting from the station is afforded through the two BB/Modem units in an IDU assembly implemented by connecting the Vmain to the PWR socket present on BB/Modem 1 and the Vreserve (when required) to the PWR socket present on BB/ Modem 2 (the position of the BB/Modem units inside the IDU assembly is shown in Fig. 2.2). When the Vreserve is not present, the BB/Modem units must be contemporarily powered from the same power source through two separate cables thereby allowing to carry out maintenance works on one of the two BB/Modem units without compromising system operation (typical for 1+1 equipment). The distribution pattern of the auxiliary power supply within the BB Modem units and IDU assembly is illustrated in Fig. 2.15. The Relay Block (RL) is activated through the manual command (PW1/2__SW1/2o) situated on the Alarms Restitution unit thereby allowing to distribute the power delivered by the station to other units. Should the polarity at the input pins not be compatible, a circuit present on the cited block will invalidate the manual command thereby not energizing the relay. After having successfully surpassed the Relay Block, the -48V is decoupled through the diodes in order to parallel-power the two BB/Modem units and relative ODU's. Each BB/Modem unit generates a filtered -48V (-48F) which serves to power the Controller unit and the Alarms unit: the latter will in turn power the Fan unit. With regard to power supply protection, the -48F are OR'ed on the Back-panel. A Fan management circuit is fitted on the Alarms Restitution unit. The circuit is powered by a subsidiary source outputting from the BB/Modem units (3v3BB) that are OR'ed on the Back-panel, and by a power supply (3,3V) generated by the Controller unit (SPI_ALIM). The latter power supply keeps the circuit live for the management of the Fan circuit should the 3v3BB source fail.

2-32
ODU filter -VODU.o FO +VBAT FI DC/DC
terziary p.s. 3V3BB.o
CONTROLLER to ODU cable

-48 with IF -VODU.i
2 - PLANNING
Fig. 2.15
MODEM 1
cable control + insert IF C-IF
-VBAT.o -VBAT.i
SPI_ALIM
+VF.o -VF.o
PW_SW1/2.i
+VMAIN
-48F RL
-VMAIN
BAND 1 1 BBBASE Modem PWR -48V Input
battery sens. SB
ALMBAT.o
ALARM RESTITUTION
PW1_SW1/2.o
SPI_ALIM.i
PW2_SW1/2.o
3V3BB.i
+VF.i ODU filter -VODU.o -VODU.i
-VF.i
+VFAN.o
-VFAN.o -48 with IF MODEM 2
to ODU cable
cable control + insert IF C-IF
+VBAT FI DC/DC
terziary p.s. 3V3BB.o
Battery protection block diagram (in IDU assembly)
FAN
+VFAN.i
-VBAT.o -VBAT.i RL
-VFAN.i +VF.o -VF.o -48F
PW_SW1/2.i
battery sens.
BASE BAND 22 BB Modem PWR
SB
ALMBAT.o

-48V Input
2 - PLANNING

2.1.10 Facility & services
The SDH signal contains several standardized overhead bytes for operation, maintenance, communication and performance monitoring functions. The SOH bytes are divided into two separate areas: the rows 1 to 3 (27 bytes) are accessed and processed within the Regenerator Section (RS) and are defined Regenerator Section OverHead (RSOH), while the 45 bytes included in the rows 5 to 9 of the SOH pattern are called Multiplex Section OverHead (MSOH) bytes and are available for equipment terminating a Multiplex Section (MS). SRA 4 allows the access to rows 1 to 3 as it is used only as Regenerator Section (RST). The functions of the various bytes in SOH are summarised in Fig. 2.16 and Tab. 2.12 (according to ETSI/TM4, ITU-T/G. 708-Study Group 13 and ITU-R Study Group 9), based on the present proposal for the allocation of 6 "media-specific" bytes: see rows 2 and 3 (S22, S23, S25, S32, S33 and S35) of the RSOH (Regeneration Section OverHead) area.
Fig. 2.16
SOH Bytes Management
8 X
9 X X RSOH
1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0 2 B1 M 3 D1 M 4 M E1 M M D2 M POINTER AU K2 D6 D9 D12
F1 X D3
5 B2 B2 B2 K1 6 D4 7 D7 8 D10 D5 D8 D11
MSOH
9 S1 Z1 Z1 Z2 Z2 M1 E2 X X Bytes reserved for national use (6) M Bytes for media specific usage (6)
X Bytes reserved for future international standardization (26)

2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.12 Section OverHead bytes Name and Functions A 1, A 2: B 1: J0: D1 to D3: E 1: F1: S22 S23 S32 S25, S33, S35 frame alignment bytes parity byte for elementary regenerator section BER monitoring path trace identifier Data Comunication Channels (DCCR) omnibus/express voice service channel, regeneration section 64 kbit/s data user channel Byte used for ATCP Byte used for 64 kbit/s data channel or SCS signal in N+1 application Byte used for supervision Byte used for the wayside traffic 4 4 Total 27 Byte Rows 13 6 1 1 3 1 1 6
Byte reserved for media specific use:
Bytes reserved for national use: used by wayside traffic Bytes reserved for future international standardization: used temporary by the wayside traffic
2.1.10.1
Equipment management
SRA 4 management systems carry out all the functions required to minimising operational costs. LCT, the system dedicated to the local link management, connects the SRA 4 local and far-and terminals through the F interface. In addition NetViewer, combining Element with Network Management functions, is the Radio Network Manager for all the Siemens Radio Systems. Security Management, Fault management, Configuration Set-up, Performance Management, Metering are performed by both LCT and NetViewer, by the former on a link base, by the latter pointing to each of the Radio Systems connected to the network. Even when the NetViewer is connected to the network, LCT can make the link reconfiguration at any based network point. Fig. 2.17 shows SRA 4, running TCP/IP stack. The system can route management signals either through a pure SDH network (DCC-R) or through any TCP/IP- based DCN.

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.17 Equipment Management Architecture Radio Side
R F LCT SRA 4 management through TCP/IP DCN networks Q
Local Terminal CPU
Remote Terminal CPU
LAN DCN
NetViewer/ ENMS
TCP/IP Routing Ports
F: RS232 Q: 10/100 Base-T R: SOH byte (S23)
2.1.10.1.1 F interface
The Controller unit makes available outside a 38.4 kbit/s data channel (RS-232C standard) LCT connector to connect a local PC to configure, preset and supervise the local equipment. During the normal operation of the equipment the connection to the LCT connector is not necessary; the LCT can be used only during the commissioning and during the local maintenance activities. With regard to 1+0/1+1/2+0 systems consisting of only one IDU, the local operator must connect the PC to the LCT connector situated on the front panel of the CONTROLLER unit. With regard to N+1 (2+1/3+1) systems consisting of two IDU's, the local operator must connect the PC to the LCT connector situated on the front panel of the CONTROLLER unit on the IDU MAIN assembly (see Fig. 2.5).
2.1.10.1.2 Q interface
The IDU makes available outside a data channel to transport the TMN information of a radio network to the supervisory center. Channel Q can be accessed externally with the 10/100 BASE-T electrical interface (connector "Q-LAN" situated on the front panel of the controller unit). Connector "Q-LAN", situated on the Controller unit, is used on systems 1+0/1+1/2+0 consisting of an IDU assembly. Connector "Q-LAN" of the "IDU MAIN" assembly is used on systems N+1 (2+1/3+1) consisting of two IDU assemblies.

2 - PLANNING

2.1.11 Mechanical structure
The mechanical structure of the IDU and ODU meets the ETSI standard (ETS 300 119-1, 3, 4). The plug-in IDU is installed in a 2200 mm (Height) x 600 mm (Length) x 300 mm (Depth) rack. In the adopted solution, with only frontal access, particular efforts have been dedicated on the shielding of the plug-in indoor unit to meet the EMC and EMI specifications. Installation solutions: wall-installation and floor-installation in the center of the room (for in-line and back to back configurations).
2.1.12
Configurations
The available configurations and the IDU and ODU compositions of SRA 4 equipment are listed in par. 2.3 "EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION".

2 - PLANNING
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 2.2 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
In this paragraph the main electrical characteristics, the mechanical characteristics, and the operating environmental conditions relevant to the SRA 4 equipment are listed.
2.2.1
2.2.1.1
Electrical Characteristics
General Electrical Characteristics
SDH frame structure Bit Rate 1xSTM-1 STM-1 155.52 Mbit/s 20 ppm
Bit Rate 2xSTM-1 2x155.52 Mbit/s 20 ppm Note : The two STM-1 signals must be synchronous. I In the SRA4 IDU-STM1 not supported. STM-1 interface: electrical optical 6 GHz RF frequency range (ITU-R): 6L: F.383-7 (5925-6425 MHz) 6U: F.384-7 (6430-7110 MHz) 7 GHz RF frequency range (ITU-R): F.385-6 Annex 1 (7425-7725 MHz) F.385-6 Annex 3 (7110-7750 MHz lower) F.385-6 Annex 3 (7110-7750 MHz upper) F.385-6 Annex 4 (7425-7900 MHz) F.385-6 (f0=7275 MHz) (7125-7425 MHz) F.385-6 (f0=7575 MHz) (7425-7725 MHz) Custom (Finland) (7125-7425 MHz) 8 GHz RF frequency range (ITU-R): F.386-6 (8200-8500 MHz) F.386-6 Annex 1 (7725-8275 MHz) ITU-R/OIRT F.386-6 Annex 4 (7900-8400 MHz) F.386-6 Annex 3 (8200-8500 MHz) 10 GHz RF frequency range (CEPT): CEPT. Rec.12-05 (10000-10680 MHz) 11 GHz RF frequency range (ITU-R): F.387 Recommends 1 (10700-11700 MHz) F.387 Annex 1 (10700-11700 MHz) F.387 Annex 2 (10700-11700 MHz) 13 GHz RF frequency range (ITU-R): F.497-6 (12750-13750 MHz) Channelling: 6L GHz (128 TCM - 4D) 6U GHz (64 or 128 TCM - 4D) 7 GHz (128 TCM - 4D) 8 GHz (128 TCM - 4D) see par. 2.2.7.1 see par. 2.2.7.2 see par. 2.2.7.3 see par. 2.2.7.4 ITU-T G.703 ITU-T G.957 S-1.1

2 - PLANNING

10 GHz (128 TCM - 4D) 11 GHz (64 or 128 TCM - 4D) 13 GHz (128 TCM - 4D) see par. 2.2.7.5 see par. 2.2.7.6 see par. 2.2.7.7 252 MHz 340 MHz 154/161/168/196/245 MHz 151.614/266/311.32 MHz 350 MHz 490/530 MHz 266 MHz R70 waveguide R70 waveguide R84 waveguide R84 waveguide R100 waveguide R100 waveguide R120 waveguide UDR 70 UDR 70 UDR 84 UDR 84 UDR 100 UDR 100 UDR 120 64 TCM-4D/128 TCM-4D 350 MHz 140 MHz 7 MHz 10 MHz according to IEC 61000-4-5 -33 C to +55 C (outdoor unit) -5 C to +50 C (indoor unit)
Shifter frequency: 6L GHz 6U GHz 7 GHz 8 GHz 10 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz Output connector toward the antenna: 6L GHz 6U GHz 7 GHz 8 GHz 10 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz Antenna output flange: 6L GHz 6U GHz 7 GHz 8 GHz 10 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz Modulation Tx intermediate frequency Rx intermediate frequency FSK input/output frequency FSK output/ input frequency Lightning protection Range of temperature with guaranteed performances

2 - PLANNING

2.2.1.2 IDU/ODU Connection Characteristics
Max. IDU/ODU distance: with 3/10 50 ohm coax. cable with 1/4 50 ohm coax. cable Modulator output IF level ODU output IF level Software setting 190 m 250 m +5 dBm -16 dBm 2 dB short cable/long cable
Note: the 1/4 50 ohm coax. cable is delivered on demand.
According to the type of the cable and to the L lenght a setting must be set via software: short cable or long cable as explained in the Tab. 2.13. Tab. 2.13 Short cable/Long cable setting 1/4 coax. cable short cable L < 95 m 5 m long cable L > 95 m 5 m Braided coax. cable short cable L < 60 m 5 m long cable L > 60 m 5 m

2 - PLANNING

2.2.1.3 Transmitter Characteristics
Note: For the Tx output power of the Hot Standby version, see the par. 2.2.1.4. Tab. 2.14 6L/6U GHz +23 dBm 1 dB Max output power (typical value and tolerance at ODU flange) 7 GHz +23 dBm 1 dB 8 GHz +23 dBm 1 dB 10 GHz +21 dBm 1 dB 11 GHz +21 dBm 1 dB 13 GHz +20 dBm 1 dB
Tab. 2.15 6L/6U GHz +22 dBm
Max output power (guaranteed value at ODU flange) 7 GHz +22 dBm 8 GHz +22 dBm 10 GHz +20 dBm 11 GHz +20 dBm 13 GHz +19 dBm
Tab. 2.16 6L
AP:
RF transmitted spectrum 6U
AP:
7 GHz
AP:
8 GHz
AP:
10 GHz
AP:
11 GHz
AP:
13 GHz
AP:
128 TCM, EN 300 234 EN 301 461 EN 300 234 EN 300 234 EN 300 234 EN 301 461 EN 300 234 CC: CC: CC: CC: CC: CC: 1xSTM-1 CC:
EN 301 127 EN 301 461 EN 301 127 EN 301 127 N.A. EN 301 461 EN 301 127
64 TCM, 1xSTM-1
CC: EN 301 461
CC: EN 301 461
IF frequency Return losses at the ODU RF output Frequency stability within the temperature range -33 to +55
350 MHz 500 kHz 15 dB 5 ppm
2.2.1.4
Characteristics of the Transmitter (Hot Standby version)

In the HSBY system consider the following additional loss. Hot Standby system with balanced coupler (splitter) Main channel 3.3 dB Stand-by channel 3.3 dB Hot Standby system with unbalanced coupler Main channel 1.5 dB Stand-by channel 11.5 dB

2 - PLANNING

2.2.1.5 Receiver Characteristics
Range of RF input level within which the IF output is kept at nominal level (-16 dBm 1 dB): 6L GHz da -20 a -80 dBm 6U GHz da -20 a -80 dBm 7 GHz da -20 a -80 dBm 8 GHz da -20 a -80 dBm 10 GHz da -20 a -80 dBm 11 GHz da -20 a -80 dBm 13 GHz da -20 a -80 dBm
Tab. 2.17 Band
Rx guaranteed thresholds (dBm) for 128 TCM - 4D at ETSI point C 6L/6U GHz -70.0 -69.0 7 GHz -70.5 -69.5 8 GHz -70.0 -69.0 10 GHz -70.5 -69.5 11 GHz -70.5 -69.5 13 GHz -69.5 -68.5
Threshold BER 10-6 (dBm) Threshold BER 10 (dBm)

-8
Tab. 2.18
Rx guaranteed thresholds (dBm) for 64 TCM - 4D at ETSI point C Band Threshold BER 10 (dBm) Threshold BER 10 (dBm) IF frequency IF output impedance
-8 -6
6U GHz -72 -71 140 MHz 50 ohm balanced
11 GHz -71 -70
2.2.1.5.1 ATPC (Automatic Transmit Power Control)

ATPC type Max. ATPC range Tx max. power PRx threshold for ATPC intervention: 128 TCM 64 TCM continuous 15 dB 2 dB PMIN + ATPC Range selectable via software from -70 to -40 dBm selectable via software from -70 to -40 dBm
2.2.1.6
Tab. 2.19
Modemodulator
Modulation Type Type of modulation 128 TCM - 4D + Reed Solomon with concatenated coding 64 TCM - 4D + Reed Solomon with concatenated coding Information bits/symbol 6.5 5.5

2 - PLANNING

2.2.1.7 Digital Service Channels
F1 S23 Way Side Traffic(***) 1x64 kbit/s (byte F1) V.11 interface (or G.703 ) (*)(**) 1x64 kbit/s (byte S23) G.703 interface (or V.11) (*) 2 Mbit/s G.703 interface (plesiochronous)
(*) If F1 is configured as V.11, S23 must be configured as G.703 or viceversa. (**) In N+1 configuration byte F1 is used only. (***) Available with 2xSTM1 BB/Modem unit only.
2.2.1.8
Baseband Interfaces
STM-1 (155.52 Mbit/s) electrical optical ITU-T G.703 ITU-T G.957 S1.1
2.2.1.9
1+1 protection
Type of Dem switching Switching mode hitless/errors free settable revertive/non revertive
The feature errors free means that in the entire switching process no bit errors shall occur at the STM-1 tributary output, that is: the switching logic shall switch before any bit error incoming; during the switching no bit errors should occur; no pattern loss shall occur in the entire process. The switch criteria are based on S/N (Signal to Noise Ratio) measurements and not BER estimator. The Dem switch occurs when there are both the following conditions: S/N (S/N)threshold S/N (S/N)protection_flow + hysteresis where the values of S/N threshold are shown in Tab. 2.20.
Tab. 2.20
Typical Hitless switch thresholds EW-L Thr. Modulation in 1xSTM-1 128 TCM 1xSTM-1 64 TCM 28.7 dB 25.6 dB S/N out 29.4 dB 26.6 dB in 26.7 dB 24.0 dB EW-H Thr. S/N out 27.5 dB 24.8 dB in 25.5 dB 21.8 dB EW-HH Thr. S/N out 26.1 dB 22.6 dB

2 - PLANNING

2.2.1.10 External alarms electrical specifications
Input alarm logic state: floating --> logic 0 --> normal condition ground --> logic 1 --> alarm condition Output alarm logic state: ground --> logic 0 --> ON condition open --> logic 1 --> OFF condition Output telecontrol logic state ground --> logic 0 --> ON condition open --> logic 1 --> OFF condition
Note: The logical state associated to the alarm condition at the input (station alarms) is software programmable.
2.2.1.11
System Power Supply

The power supply meets racc. ETSI EN 300-132-2: Nominal voltage -48 Vdc 20 %
2.2.1.12
Tab. 2.21
Power Consumption (from 48 V battery)

Maximum Power consumption (from battery 48 V) with 10% tolerance IDU 1+0 (1xSTM1) IDU 1+0 (2xSTM1) IDU 1+1 (1xSTM1) IDU 1+1 (2xSTM1) 6LGHz ODU 60 W 6U GHz 60 W 26 W Electrical/27 W Optical 30 W Electrical/32 W Optical 45 W Electrical/46 W Optical 51 W Electrical/55 W Optical
7 GHz 60 W
8 GHz 60 W
10 GHz 60 W
11 GHz 60 W
13 GHz 60 W

2 - PLANNING

2.2.2 Loop-backs
The following 3 loop-backs are available in the IDU on the BB+MODEM unit: 1. 2. 3. Fig. 2.18 Loop-back 1 (Trib.) - Tributary loop on the STM-1 input/output interface Lopp-back 2 (Trib. side int.) - Tributary loop inside the BB+MODEM unit (the signal before the MODEM section is lopped back). Loop-back 3 (Radio ext.) - Radio loop at the tributary section.
Loop-back 1 (Trib.)
I/O INTERFACE BB SECTION MODEM SECTION
STM-1
Fig. 2.19
Loop-back 2 (Trib. side int.)

STM-1
Fig. 2.20
Loop-back 3 (Radio ext.)

STM-1
All the loopbacks should be set by LCT and TMN.

2 - PLANNING

2.2.3 Mechanical characteristics
The mechanical characteristics of the indoor equipment are in accordance with the standards as defined by ETSI (EN 300 119-3, 4, rack and subrack respectively). The racks are so dimensioned: height width depth standard shelf height width depth ETSI rack Indoor Unit (fully equipped) Outdoor Unit 2200 mm 600 mm 300 mm 2 U (ETSI and 19) 365 mm 280 mm 180 mm 57 Kg 5 Kg 9 Kg
The IDU sub-rack has the following dimensions: The ODU mechanical characteristics are:
Weight of modules
2.2.4
Environmental characteristics
The equipment meets the environmental conditions Indoor equipment: Normal conditions: Class 3.2 Temperature limits Humidity limits Maximum temperature limit -5 to +50C 5% to 95% Up to +55C (without permanent damages)
Outdoor equipment: Normal conditions: Class 4.1 Temperature limits Humidity limits -33 to +55C 15% to 100%

2 - PLANNING

2.2.5 EMC/EMI
The equipment is compliant to EMI/EMC parameters according to the above listed standards and to ETSI standards EN 301 489-1 e EN 301 489-4. N.B.: criterion 1: no degradation of normal performance (no errors) criterion 2: degradation of normal performance / loss of functionality, with auto recovery Electrostatic discharge RF electromagnetic field immunity (80-2000 MHz) Electrical Fast Transient/ Burst (EFT/B) immunity Surge immunity Radio frequency common mode (0.15-80 MHz) Conducted emission Radiated emission according to IEC 61000-4-2, criterion 1 Level 2 ( 4kV contact), level 3 ( 8kV air ), according to IEC 61000-4-3, criterion 1 (3 V/m for IDU and 30 V/m for ODU) accord. to IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, criterion 1 (DC lines 2kV; Signal and control lines 1kV) accord. to IEC 61000-4-5, criterion 2 Class 2 (Signal and control lines 0.5kV) accord. to IEC 61000-4-6, Level 2 (3 Vrms) criterion 1 according to EN 55022/CISPR22, Class B according to EN 55022/CISPR22, Class B
2.2.6
Safety characteristics
Safety according to EN 60950-1

2 - PLANNING

2.2.7 RF Channelling
In the following are listed the tables of the channeling foreseen in the available RF bands. In the tables is present the 3-digit extension P/N of the ODU, which indicates the channel at which the ODU has been adjusted in factory. In the tables is also present the extension P/N of the duplexer, because the duplexer is the only unit in the ODU which depends on the frequency and for this reason is adjusted in factory according to the RF channel.
2.2.7.1
6L GHz channelling
By the LCT the channel frequency can be set at 250 kHz step.
Tab. 2.22
6L GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.383-7 MAIN (1 digit cod. 1) Shifter = 252.040 MHz GO (MHz) Ext. P/N ODU 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 527-703/57 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 RETURN (MHz) 6197,240 6226,890 6256,540 6286,190 6315,840 6345,490 6375,140 6404,790 Ext. P/N ODU 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 527-703/57 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Tab. 2.23
5945,200 5974,850 6004,500 6034.150 6063,800 6093,450 6123,100 6152,750
6L GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.383-7 INTERLEAVED (1 digit cod. 2) Shifter = 252.040 MHz GO (MHz) Ext. P/N ODU 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 527-703/57 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 RETURN (MHz) 6182,415 6212,065 6241,715 6271,365 6301,015 6330,665 6360,315 6389,965 Ext. P/N ODU 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 527-703/57 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5930,375 5960,025 5989,675 6019,325 6048,975 6078,625 6108,275 6137,925

2 - PLANNING

2.2.7.2
Tab. 2.24
6U GHz channelling
6U GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.384-7 MAIN (1 digit cod. 3) Shifter = 340 MHz GO (MHz) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 85 6460 6500 6540 6580 6620 6660 6700 6740 Ext. P/N ODU 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 527-703/58 Duplexer P/N Ext. Ext. RETURN P/N P/N (MHz) ODU Dupl. 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 6800 6840 6880 6920 6960 7000 7040 7080 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 527-703/58 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308
Tab. 2.25
6U GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.384-7 INTERLEAVED (1 digit cod. 4) Shifter = 340 MHz GO (MHz) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 85 6440 6480 6520 6560 6600 6640 6680 6720 Ext. P/N ODU 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 527-703/58 Duplexer P/N Ext. Ext. RETURN P/N P/N (MHz) Dupl. ODU 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 6780 6820 6860 6920 6940 6980 7020 7060 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 527-703/58 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408

2 - PLANNING

2.2.7.3
Tab. 2.26
7 GHz channelling
7 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 3 (1st digit ext. P/N = 1) High = 7597 1 2 3 4 5 Low = 7297 1 2 3 4 5 Shifter = 168 MHz GO (MHz) 7457 7485 7513 7541 7569 Ext. P/N ODU 106 107 108 109 110 Ext. P/N ODU 101 102 103 104 105 527-725/27 527-705/26 527-705/35 Duplexer P/N Ext. Ext. RETURN P/N P/N (MHz) ODU Dupl. 106 107 108 109 110 7625 7653 7681 7709 7737 156 157 158 159 160 527-705/35 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 106 107 108 109 110 Ext. P/N Dupl. 101 527-705/26 102 103 104 527-705/27 105
Shifter = 196 MHz GO (MHz) 7121 7149 7177 7205 7233 Duplexer P/N Ext. Ext. RETURN P/N P/N (MHz) Dupl. ODU 101 102 103 104 105 7317 7345 7373 7401 7429 151 152 153 154 155 Duplexer P/N

2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.27 7 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 1 (1st digit ext. P/N = 2) Shifter = 154 MHz GO (MHz) 1 2 3 4 5 7442 7470 7498 7526 7554 Ext. P/N ODU 201 202 203 204 205 527-705/35 Duplexer P/N Ext. Ext. RETURN P/N P/N (MHz) ODU Dupl. 201 202 203 204 205 7596 7624 7652 7680 7708 251 252 253 254 255 527-705/35 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 201 202 203 204 205
Tab. 2.28
7 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.385-6 (1st digit ext. P/N = 3) Shifter = 161 MHz (F0=7575 ) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 GO (MHz) 7428 7435 7442 7449 7456 7463 7470 7477 7484 7491 7498 7505 7512 7519 7526 7533 7540 7547 7554 7561 Ext. P/N ODU 321 322 323 324 352 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 527-705/35 Duplexer P/N Ext. Ext. RETURN P/N P/N (MHz) ODU Dupl. 321 322 323 324 352 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 7589 7596 7603 7610 7617 7624 7631 7638 7645 7652 7659 7666 7673 7680 7687 7694 7701 7708 7715 7722 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 527-705/35 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340

2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.29 7 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.385-6 (1st digit ext. P/N = 3) Shifter = 161 MHz (F0=7275) GO (MHz) 7128 7135 7142 7149 7156 7163 7170 7177 7184 7191 7198 7205 7212 7219 7226 7233 7240 7247 7254 7261 Ext. P/N ODU 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 527-705/31 527-705/26 Duplexer P/N Ext. Ext. RETURN P/N P/N (MHz) ODU Dupl. 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 7289 7296 7303 7310 7317 7324 7331 7338 7345 7352 7359 7366 7373 7380 7387 7394 7401 7408 7415 7422 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 527-705/31 527-705/26 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Tab. 2.30
7 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 4 (1st digit ext. P/N = 4) Shifter = 245 MHz GO (MHz) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7442 7470 7498 7526 7554 7582 7610 7638 Ext. P/N ODU 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 527-705/38 527-705/36 Duplexer P/N 527-705/35 Ext. Ext. RETURN P/N P/N (MHz) Dupl. ODU 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 7687 7715 7743 7771 7799 7827 7855 7883 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 527-705/38 527-705/36 Duplexer P/N 527-705/35 Ext. P/N Dupl. 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408

2 - PLANNING

2.2.7.4 8 GHz channelling
In the 8 GHz range, some channels have frequencies and shifter that are not integral multiple values of 250 kHz (minimum resolution allowed by the ODU configuration software). In these cases, the ODUs are configured by means of the values reported in bold and between brackets in the following tables. Then, the parameters can be different from those defined by the ITU-R channelling but, considering the frequency stabilty of the 8 GHz ODU, the EN-300-234 reference normative is however respected. Tab. 2.31 8 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 1 MAIN (1st digit ext. P/N = 1) Shifter = 311.320 MHz (311.250 MHz) GO (MHz) 7747.700 (7747.750) 7777.350 (7777.500) 7807.000 (7807.000) 7836.650 (7836.750) 7866.300 (7866.250) 7895.950 (7896.000) 7925.600 (7925.750) 7955.250 (7955.250) Ext. P/N ODU 101 102 527-705/62 103 104 105 106 107 108 527-705/67 527-705/66 103 104 105 106 107 108 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 101 102 RETURN (MHz) 8059.020 (8059.000) 8088.670 (8088.750) 8118.320 (8118.250) 8147.970 (8148.000) 8177.620 (8177.500) 8207.270 (8207.250) 8236.920 (8237.000) 8266.570 8266.500) Ext. P/N ODU 151 152 527-705/62 153 154 155 156 157 158 527-705/67 527-705/66 103 104 105 106 107 108 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 101 102
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.32 8 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 1 INTERLEAVED (1st digit ext. P/N = 2) Shifter = 311.320 MHz (311.250 MHz) GO (MHz) 7732.875 (7733.000) 7762.525 (7762.500) 7792.175 (7792.250) 7821.825 (7821.750) 7851.475 (7851.500) 7881.125 (7881.250) 7910.775 (7910.750) 7940.425 (7940.500) Ext. P/N ODU 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 527-705/67 527-705/62 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 RETURN (MHz) 8044.195 (8044.250) 8073.845 (8073.750) 8103.495 (8103.500) 8133.145 (8133.000) 8162.795 (8162.750) 8192.445 (8192.500) 8222.095 (8222.000) 8251.745 8251.750) Ext. P/N ODU 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 527-705/67 527-705/62 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Tab. 2.33
8 GHz channelling according to OIRT/ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 4 (1st digit ext. P/N = 3) Shifter = 266 MHz GO (MHz) Ext. P/N ODU 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 527-705/70 527-705/71 527-705/67 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 RETURN (MHz) 8192 8220 8248 8276 8304 8332 8360 8388 Ext. P/N ODU 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 527-705/70 527-705/71 527-705/67 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
7926 7954 7982 8010 8038 8066 8094 8122

2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.34 8 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.386-6 (1st digit ext. P/N = 4) Shifter = 151.614 MHz (151.500 MHz) GO (MHz) 8210.048 (8210.000) 8233.372 (8233.500) 8256.696 (8256.750) 8280.020 (8280.000) 8303.344 (8303.500) 8326.668 (8326.750) Ext. P/N ODU 401 403 405 527-705/73 407 409 411 407 409 411 Ext. Duplexer P/N P/N Dupl. 401 403 405 RETURN (MHz) 8361.662 (8361.500) 8384.986 (8385.000) 8408.310 (8408.250) 8431.634 (8431.500) 8454.958 (8455.000) 8478.282 (8478.250) Ext. P/N ODU 451 453 455 527-705/73 457 459 461 407 409 411 Ext. Duplexer P/N P/N Dupl. 401 403 405
1 3 5 7 9 11
Tab. 2.35
8 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 3 (1st digit ext. P/N = 0) Shifter = 119 MHz GO (MHz) Ext. P/N ODU 001 002 003 004 005 006 527-705/74 527-705/73 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 001 002 003 004 005 006 RETURN (MHz) 8412 8426 8440 8454 8468 8482 Ext. P/N ODU 051 052 053 054 055 056 527-705/74 527-705/73 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 001 002 003 004 005 006
1 2 3 4 5 6
8293 8307 8321 8335 8349 8363

2 - PLANNING

2.2.7.5
Tab. 2.36
10 GHz channelling
10 GHz channelling according to CEPT.Rec 12-05 CEPT.Rec 12-05 (Shifter = 350 MHz - 1 digit cod. 1) ext ODU=100 => TF-MIN=10008 MHz; TF_MAX=10160 MHz GO (MHz) 1 2 3 4 5 10028 10056 10084 10112 10140 Ext. P/N ODU 100 100 100 100 100 527-904/92 001 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. ext ODU=150 => TF-MIN=10358 MHz; TF_MAX=10510 MHz GO (MHz) 10378 10406 10434 10462 10490 Ext. P/N ODU 150 150 150 150 150 527-904/92 001 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl.
ext ODU=101 => TF-MIN=101408 MHz; TF_MAX=10300 MHz GO (MHz) 1 2 3 4 5 10168 10196 10224 10252 10280 Ext. P/N ODU 101 101 101 101 101 527-904/92 002 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl.
ext ODU=151 => TF-MIN=10498 MHz; TF_MAX=10650 MHz GO (MHz) 10518 10546 10574 10602 10630 Ext. P/N ODU 151 151 151 151 151 527-904/92 002 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl.

2 - PLANNING

2.2.7.6
Tab. 2.37
11 GHz channelling
11 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.387 Recommends 1 Main (1st digit ext. P/N = 1) Shifter = 530 MHz GO (MHz) Ext. P/N ODU 110 110 110 110 110 110 111 111 111 111 111 111 527-904/84 527-904/84 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 007 007 007 007 007 007 008 008 008 008 008 008 RETURN (MHz) 11245 11285 11325 11365 11405 11445 11485 11525 11565 11605 11645 11685 Ext. P/N ODU 160 160 160 160 160 160 161 161 161 161 161 161 527-904/84 527-904/84 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 007 007 007 007 007 007 008 008 008 008 008 008
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
10715 10755 10795 10835 10875 10915 10955 10995 11035 11075 11115 11155
Tab. 2.38
11 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.387 Recommends 1 Interleaved/Annex 1 (1st digit ext. P/N = 2) Shifter = 530 MHz GO (MHz) Ext. P/N ODU 210 210 210 210 210 210 211 211 211 211 211 211 527-904/84 527-904/84 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 009 009 009 009 009 009 010 010 010 010 010 010 RETURN (MHz) 11225 11265 11305 11345 11385 11425 11465 11505 11545 11585 11625 11665 Ext. P/N ODU 260 260 260 260 260 260 261 261 261 261 261 261 527-904/84 527-904/84 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 009 009 009 009 009 009 010 010 010 010 010 010
1 (*) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
10695 10735 10775 10815 10855 10895 10935 10975 11015 11055 11095 11135
(*) Not available for Annex 1

2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.39 11 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.387 Annex 2/CEPT 12-06 Recommends 3 (1st digit ext. P/N = 3) Shifter = 490 MHz GO (MHz) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 10735 10775 10815 10855 10895 10935 10975 11015 11055 11095 11135 11175 Ext. P/N ODU 310 310 310 310 310 310 311 311 311 311 311 311 527-904/84 527-904/84 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 011 011 011 011 011 011 012 012 012 012 012 012 RETURN (MHz) 11225 11265 11305 11345 11385 11425 11465 11505 11545 11585 11625 11665 Ext. P/N ODU 360 360 360 360 360 360 361 361 361 361 361 361 527-904/84 527-904/84 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 011 011 011 011 011 011 012 012 012 012 012 012
2.2.7.7
Tab. 2.40
13 GHz channelling
13 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.497-6 Main (Interleaved) (1 digit ext. P/N = 1) Shifter = 266 MHz GO (MHz) Ext. P/N ODU 100 100 527-904/74 100 100 101 101 527-904/74 101 101 002 002 001 001 002 002 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 001 001 RETURN (MHz) 13031 (13045) 13059 (13073) 13087 (13101) 13115 (13129) 13143 (13157) 13171 (13185) 13199 (13213) 13227 (13241) Ext. P/N ODU 150 150 527-904/74 150 150 151 151 527-904/74 151 151 002 002 001 001 002 002 Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N Dupl. 001 001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12765 (12779) 12793 (12807) 12821 (12835) 12849 (12863) 12877 (12891) 12905 (12919) 12933 (12947) 12961 (12975)
Note: between brackets the interleaved channelling is shown.

2 - PLANNING
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 2.3 EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION
This paragraph lists and shows the "main parts" the equipment consists of. As "main parts" are indented the units which are autonomous from a structural and functional point of view and are accessible and extractable from the two separate modules the system consists of: indoor assembly outdoor assembly
The outdoor assembly is a transceiver housed in a very compact tight container, installed on the antenna or on pole. The indoor assembly consists of an ETSI rack, equipped with one sub-rack IDU. The two assemblies (sub-racks) are IF-level connected by single coaxial cable.
The optional "EXTERNAL EOW" assembly (P/N 705-102/01), which provides the EOW functionalities, is described in the relevant UMN manual.

2 - PLANNING

2.3.1 System configurations
For the equipment are provided the configurations listed in Tab. 2.41. Tab. 2.41 System configurations Configuration 1+0 (Note 3) 1+1 HSBY (Note 3) 2+0 DP or 1+1 DP (Note 3) 1+1 FD (Note 3) 2+0 CC (Note 4) Denomination 1+0 system with independent antenna (Note 1) 1+1 system with Hot Standby (Note 2) 2+0 system with dual polarization with adjacent channels or 1+1 system with dual polarization with adjacent channels (Note 1) 1+1 system heterofrequency copolar (with circulator) (Note 1) 2+0 system with dual polarization co-channel configuration Ref. to Figure Fig. 2.21 Fig. 2.22
Fig. 2.23
Fig. 2.24 Fig. 2.25 Fig. 2.26 Fig. 2.27 Fig. 2.28 Fig. 2.29 Fig. 2.30
2x(1+1) FD CC 2x(1+1) system with dual polarization co-channel (Note 4) configuration ( with one antenna) 2x(1+1) FD CC 2x(1+1) system with dual polarization co-channel (Note 4) configuration ( with two antennas) 2x(1+1) HSBY CC (Note 4) N+1 (2+1/3+1) (Note 4) 2x(1+1) Hot Standby system with dual polarization co-channel configuration N+1 system with Alternate Pattern (AP)
Note 1: The waveguide connection between ODU and antenna can be flexible or elliptical type. Note 2: The coupler can be balanced or unbalanced type. Note 3: Configuration with SRA4 IDU and SRA4 IDU-STM1. Note 4: Configuration with SRA4 IDU only.

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.21 1+0 system with independent antenna
FLEXIBLE WAVE GUIDE
VERTICAL 1+0 SUPPORT
ODU AP or AP/CC COAXIAL CABLE
FIXING ON THE RACK OF COAXIAL CABLE IDU
ETSI RACK (19)

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.22 1+1 system with Hot Standby
VERTICAL 1+1 SUPPORT FLEXIBLE WAVE GUIDE
ODU AP or AP/CC
ODU AP or AP/CC
COAXIAL CABLE
FIXING ON RACK OF COAXIAL CABLE
IDU
External EOW (OPTIONAL) ETSI RACK (19)

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.23 2+0 system with dual polarization
FLEXIBLE WAVE GUIDE
VERTICAL 1+0 SUPPORT FLEXIBLE WAVE GUIDE
ODU AP or AP/CC
ODU AP or AP/CC
COAXIAL CABLE
IDU
External EOW (OPTIONAL) ETSI RACK (19

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.24 1+1 system copolar
VERTICAL 1+1 SUPPORT FLEXIBLE WAVE GUID
ODU AP or AP/CC
ODU AP or AP/CC
COAXIAL CABLE
IDU

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.25 2+0 system with dual polarization co-channel configuration
FLEXIBLE WAVEGUIDE
AP/CC ODU
IF LO SYNCH CO-CHANNEL CABLE
RF-LO SYNCH CO-CHANNEL CABLE
AP/CC ODU
COAXIAL CABLE
IDU
EOW
ETSI RACK (19

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.26 2x(1+1) FD with dual polarization co-channel configuration (with one antenna)
FLEXIBLE WAVEGUIDE
ODU SUPPORT (1+1 co-polar) IF LO SYNCH CO-CHANNEL CABLE
AP/CC ODU
AP/CC ODU
RF LO SYNCH CO-CHANNEL CABLE
ODU SUPPORT (1+1 co-polar) AP/CC ODU AP/CC ODU
RF LO SYNCH CO-CHANNEL CABLE
COAXIAL CABLE
1st IDU (1+1) V-pol. 2nd IDU (1+1) H-pol.
ETSI RACK (19

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.27 2x(1+1) FD with dual polarization co-channel configuration (with two antennas)
FLEXIBLE WAVEGUIDE ODU SUPPORT (1+1 cross-polar)
AP/CC ODU AP/CC ODU RF-LO SYNCH CO-CHANNEL CABLE
ODU SUPPORT (1+1 cross-polar)
AP/CC ODU AP/CC ODU
1st IDU (1+1) V-H pol. 2nd IDU (1+1) H-V pol.

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.28 2x(1+1) Hot Standby with dual polarization co-channel configuration
FLEXIBLE WAVEGUIDE
ODU SUPPORT (1+1 HSBY) IF LO SYNCH CO-CHANNEL CABLE
AP/CC ODU
AP/CC ODU
ODU SUPPORT (1+1 HSBY) AP/CC ODU AP/CC ODU
COAXIAL CABLE
1st IDU (1+1) HSBY V-pol. 2nd IDU (1+1) HSBY H-pol.
ETSI RACK (19

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.29 N+1 (2+1) system with Alternate Pattern (AP) configuration
ELLIPTICATL WAVE GUIDES VERTICAL 1+1 SUPPORT ELLIPTICATL WAVE GUIDE
ODU (ST.BY) APor AP/CC
ODU (CH.1) AP or AP/CC VERTICAL 1+0 SUPPORT
ELLIPTICATL WAVE GUIDE
ODU (CH.2) AP or AP/CC
COAXIAL CABLE
FIXING ON RACK OF COAXIAL CABLE MAIN IDU (STBY + CH. 1) EXP IDU (CH. 2)
ETSI RACK (19

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.30 N+1 (3+1) system with Alternate Pattern (AP) configuration
ELLIPTICATL WAVE GUIDES VERTICAL 1+1 SUPPORT ELLIPTICATL WAVE GUIDE
ODU (ST.BY) APor AP/CC
ELLIPTICATL WAVE GUIDE
ODU (CH.2) APor AP/CC
COAXIAL CABLE
FIXING ON RACK OF COAXIAL CABLE MAIN IDU (STBY + CH. 1) EXP IDU (CH. 2 + CH.3) ETSI RACK (19
+ -

2 - PLANNING

2.3.2 Equipment composition
Tab. 2.42 below shows the composition of the equipment (P/N. 802-300/12) and it is used to transmit in all the available bands (6-13 GHz). The AP system can be used in the following configurations: Tab. 2.42 1+0 1+1 HSBY 1+1 2+0 N+1 2+0 2x(1+1) FD 2x(1+1) Hot Standby
The CC system can be used in the following configurations:
SRA 4 equipment composition (P/N 802-300/12) Outdoor Assembly 6 GHz P/N

(6L) 735-211/06B
Indoor Assembly Equipment (Note) ETSI Rack P/N IDU Assembly P/N 7 GHz P/N
735-201/07 or 735-211/07
8 GHz P/N
10 GHz P/N
11 GHz P/N
13 GHz P/N
STM-1 AP systems (64 or 128 TCM-4D) STM-1 CC systems (64 or 128 TCM-4D)
627-65/002
702-300/12 (6U) 735-211/06C (6L) 735-211/06B
735-201/08 735-201/11 735-201/13 or 735-201/10 or or 735-211/08 735-211/11 735-211/13
627-65/002
702-300/12 (6U) 735-211/06C
735-211/07
735-211/08
735-211/11 735-211/13
Note: The 64 TCM-4D modulation is available in the 6U and 11 GHz bands.

2 - PLANNING

2.3.3 Indoor assembly composition
The indoor assembly consists of: an ETSI wired rack; one IDU assembly in 1+0/1+1/2+0 configuration (refer to Fig. 2.31) or two IDU assembly in N+1 configuration (refer to Fig. 2.32) or 2x(1+1) (refer to Fig. 2.33), and one External EOW optional assembly P/N 705-102/01 (refer to Fig. 2.31, Fig. 2.32 and Fig. 2.33).
Fig. 2.31
1+0/1+1/2+0 Indoor assembly
SRA4 IDU
External EOW Assembly (optional) P/N 705-102/01 WIRED RACK P/N 627-65/002
SRA4 IDU-STM1

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.32 N+1 Indoor assembly
2+1 CONFIGURATION
IDU MAIN UNIT
IDU EXT UNIT
3+1 CONFIGURATION
IDU MAIN UNIT
IDU EXT UNIT
External EOW Assembly (optional) WIRED RACK P/N 627-65/002

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.33 2x(1+1) FD CC Indoor assembly
2x(1+1) CONFIGURATION
1st (1+1) IDU assembly CH1+CH2 V-pol.
2nd (1+1) IDU assembly CH1+CH2 H-pol. External EOW Assembly (optional) P/N 705-102/01
WIRED RACK P/N 627-65/002
Fig. 2.34
2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC Indoor assembly
2x(1+1) CONFIGURATION
1st (1+1) IDU assembly Main+Stby V-pol.
2nd (1+1) IDU assembly Main+Stby H-pol. External EOW Assembly (optional) P/N 705-102/01
WIRED RACK P/N 627-65/002

2 - PLANNING

2.3.3.1 IDU equipment as a function of the configurations
The system can assume the configurations (System Types) listed in Tab. 2.43. All the configurations are without MST. In Tab. 2.44 the indoor assembly composition is set down according to the configuration (1, 2, ... 6) listed in Tab. 2.43. Tab. 2.47 to Tab. 2.51 show the indoor assembly composition. In Tab. 2.45 the indoor assembly composition is set down according to the configuration (7, 8, 9 and 10) listed in Tab. 2.43. Tab. 2.57 to Tab. 2.58 show the indoor assembly composition. In Tab. 2.46 the indoor assembly composition is set down according to configuration 11 listed in Tab. 2.43. Tab. 2.59 to Tab. 2.60 show the indoor assembly composition. Tab. 2.43 System types System Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1. 2. 3. 1+0 1) 1+1 Hot Standby Terminal, STI (Single Tributary Interface) 1) 2) 1+1 Hot Standby Terminal, DTI (Dual Tributary Interface) 3) 1+1 Frequency Diversity Terminal, STI (Single Tributary Interface) 1) 2) 1+1 Frequency Diversity Terminal, DTI (Dual Tributary Interface) 3) 2+0 1) 2x(1+1) Frequency Diversity Terminal, STI (Single Tributary Interface) 2) 2x(1+1) Frequency Diversity Terminal, DTI (Dual Tributary Interface) 3) 2x(1+1) Hot Standby Terminal, STI (Single Tributary Interface) 2) 2x(1+1) Hot Standby Terminal, DTI (Dual Tributary Interface) 3) N+1 Terminal, STI (Single Tributary Interface) 2) Denomination
Configuration with SRA4 IDU and SRA4 IDU-STM1. Configuration without tributary protection. Configuration with tributary protection.

2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.44 Supported units in system types 1, 2, ... 6 Ref. Fig. 2.35 and Fig. 2.36 A B C D E Notes: R = Required System Types Units 1 R R R R 2 R R R R R 3 R R R R R 4 R R R R R 5 R R R R R 6 R R R R R
BB-MODEM unit BB-MODEM unit Controller unit Alarm restitution unit Fan unit
Tab. 2.45
Supported units in system types 7, 8. 9 and 10 (2x(1+1) CC version) Ref. Fig. 2.37 A B C D E Ref. Fig. 2.37 A B C D E Notes: R = Required Units (IDU Assembly V(H) Pol.) BB-MODEM unit BB-MODEM unit Controller unit Alarm restitution unit Fan unit Units (IDU Assembly H(V) Pol.) BB-MODEM unit BB-MODEM unit Controller unit Alarm restitution unit Fan unit 1+1 R R R R R 1+1 R R R R R

2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.46 Supported units in system type 11 (2+1/3+1 version) Ref. Fig. 2.38 A B C D E Ref. Fig. 2.38 A B C D E Notes: R = Required Units (IDU MAIN unit) BB-MODEM unit BB-MODEM unit Controller unit Alarm restitution unit Fan unit Units (IDU EXT unit) BB-MODEM unit BB-MODEM unit Controller unit Alarm restitution unit Fan unit R R R 2+1 R R R R R 2+1 R 3+1 R R R R R 3+1 R R R R R

2 - PLANNING

2.3.3.2 Indoor assembly composition (IDU)
The IDU assembly is available in 8 versions according to the configuration (1+0 or 1+1/2+0/2x(1+1)/2+1/3+1) and to the interface (electrical or optical):
1+0 Electrical IDU P/N 702-300/12A (SRA4 IDU) 1+0 Optical IDU P/N 702-300/12B SRA4 IDU P/N 702-300/12C 1+1/2+0 Electrical IDU (SRA4 IDU) 1+1/2+0 P/N 702-300/12D Optical IDU (SRA4 IDU) 1+0 Electrical IDU P/N 702-300/12F (SRA4 IDU-STM1) 1+0 Optical IDU P/N 702-300/12G (SRA4 IDU-STM1) 1+1/2+0 P/N 702-300/12M Electrical IDU (SRA4 IDU-STM1) 1+1/2+0 P/N 702-300/12N Optical IDU (SRA4 IDU-STM1) 2x(1+1) Electrical IDU P/N 702-300/12C (SRA4 IDU) 2x(1+1) Optical IDUP/N 702-300/12D (SRA4 IDU) 2+1 Electrical IDU P/N 702-300/12C (SRA4 IDU) P/N 702-300/12A 2+1 Optical IDU P/N 702-300/12D (SRA4 IDU) P/N 702-300/12B 3+1 Electrical IDU P/N 702-300/12C (SRA4 IDU) 3+1 Optical IDU P/N 702-300/12D (SRA4 IDU)
Q.ty 1 Q.ty 1 Q.ty 1
Tab. 2.47 Tab. 2.49 Tab. 2.48
Q.ty 1
Tab. 2.50
Q.ty 1 Q.ty 1 Q.ty 1
Tab. 2.52 Tab. 2.54 Tab. 2.53
Q.ty 1
Tab. 2.55
Q.ty 2 (IDU V(H) Pol. + H (V) Pol. Q.ty 2 (IDU V(H) Pol. + H (V) Pol. Q.ty 1 (IDU MAIN) Q.ty 1 (IDU EXT) Q.ty 1 (IDU MAIN) Q.ty 1 (IDU EXT) Q.ty 2 (IDU MAIN +EXT) Q.ty 2 (IDU MAIN +EXT)
Tab. 2.57 Tab. 2.58 Tab. 2.59 Tab. 2.59 Tab. 2.60 Tab. 2.60 Tab. 2.59 Tab. 2.60
In the following tables are listed the units present in each version.

2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.47 1+0 Electrical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12A) Ref. Fig. 2.35 A B C D E Cover Controller unit Alarm Restitution unit Fan unit 1+0 Base accessories Denomination BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) P/N 612-314/07 224-065/54 634-001/02 614-104/66 614-041/17 597-525/21
Tab. 2.48
1+1/2+0 Electrical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12C) Ref. Fig. 2.35 A B C D E Denomination BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) Controller unit Alarm Restitution unit Fan unit 1+1 Base accessories P/N 612-314/07 612-314/07 634-001/02 614-104/66 614-041/17 597-525/22
Tab. 2.49
1+0 Optical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12B) Ref. Fig. 2.35 A B C D E Cover Controller unit Alarm Restitution unit Fan unit 1+0 Base accessories Denomination BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) P/N 612-314/06 224-065/54 634-001/02 614-104/66 614-041/17 597-525/21
Tab. 2.50
1+1/2+0 Optical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12D) Ref. Fig. 2.35 A B C D E Denomination BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) Controller unit Alarm Restitution unit Fan unit 1+1 Base accessories P/N 612-314/06 612-314/06 634-001/02 614-104/66 614-041/17 597-525/22

2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.51 Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 configuration Denomination BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) or BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) Connection elements from 1+0 to 1+1 P/N 612-314/07 612-314/06 597-525/33
Fig. 2.35
1+0/1+1/2+0 SRA4 IDU systems Indoor assembly

D E A
CHACHB ODU ALM CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR ALM I O In Out Exp. Port IF
Alarms
IDU Key I O
U n. F A N
U V11 S E R
WST G703 In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
PS IF
CHACHB
U V11 G703 S E R
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
PS

2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.52 1+0 Electrical SRA4 IDU-STM1 composition (P/N 702-300/12F) Ref. Fig. 2.36 A B C D E Cover Controller unit Alarm Restitution unit Fan unit 1+0 Base accessories Denomination BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) P/N 612-314/65 332-309/89 634-001/02 614-104/66 614-041/17 597-525/21
Tab. 2.53
1+1/2+0 Electrical SRA4 IDU-STM1 composition (P/N 702-300/12M) Ref. Fig. 2.36 A B C D E Denomination BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) Controller unit Alarm Restitution unit Fan unit 1+1 Base accessories P/N 612-314/65 612-314/65 634-001/02 614-104/66 614-041/17 597-525/22
Tab. 2.54
1+0 Optical SRA4 IDU-STM1 composition (P/N 702-300/12G) Ref. Fig. 2.36 A B C D E Cover Controller unit Alarm Restitution unit Fan unit 1+0 Base accessories Denomination BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) P/N 612-314/64 332-309/89 634-001/02 614-104/66 614-041/17 597-525/21
Tab. 2.55
1+1/2+0 Optical SRA4 IDU-STM1 composition (P/N 702-300/12F) Ref. Fig. 2.36 A B C D E Denomination BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) Controller unit Alarm Restitution unit Fan unit 1+1 Base accessories P/N 612-314/64 612-314/64 634-001/02 614-104/66 614-041/17 597-525/22

2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.56 Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 configuration Denomination BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) or BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) Connection elements from 1+0 to 1+1 P/N 612-314/65 612-314/64 597-525/33
Fig. 2.36
1+0/1+1/2+0 SRA4 IDU-STM1 systems Indoor assembly

D E A

2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.57 2x(1+1) CC Electrical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12C for IDU V(H) Pol. and IDU H(V) Pol.) Ref. Fig. 2.37 A B F G C-H D-I E-L Denomination BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) Controller unit Alarm Restitution unit Fan unit Base accessories (Note 1) N+1 base accessories (Note 3) Note 1: Quantity 2 Note 2: These accessories include the cables for the E-link. Tab. 2.58 2x(1+1) CC Optical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12C for IDU V(H) Pol. and IDU H(V) Pol.) Ref. Fig. 2.37 A B F G C-H D-I E-L Denomination BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) Controller unit Alarm Restitution unit Fan unit Base accessories (Note 1) Base accessories (Note 2) N+1 base accessories (Note 3) Note 1: Quantity 2 Note 2: These accessories include the cables for the E-link. P/N 612-314/06 612-314/06 612-314/06 612-314/06 634-001/02 614-104/66 614-041/17 597-525/22 597-525/21 597-525/57 P/N 612-314/07 612-314/07 612-314/07 612-314/07 634-001/02 614-104/66 614-041/17 597-525/22 597-525/57

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.37 2x(1+1) CC SRA4 IDU systems Indoor assembly
A
IDU V(H) Pol. unit
Alarms
IDU Key I O
U n. F A N
U V11 S E R
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
PS IF
CHACHB
U V11 S E R
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
PS
CHACHB
IDU H(V) Pol. unit
Alarms
IDU Key I O
U n. F A N
U V11 S E R
WST G703 In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
IF
PS IF
CHACHB
U V11 S E R
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
PS

2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.59 2+1/3+1 Electrical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12C for IDU Main and /12A for IDU EXT.) Ref. Fig. 2.38 A B F G C-H D-I E-L Denomination BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) (for 3+1 only) Controller unit Alarm Restitution unit Fan unit Base accessories (Note 1) Base accessories (Note 2) N+1 base accessories (Note 3) Note 1: Quantity 1 for 2+1 and quantity 2 for 3+1. Note 2: Quantity 1 for 2+1 and quantity 0 for 3+1. Note 3: These accessories include the cables for the E-link and B-link. Tab. 2.60 2+1/3+1 Optical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12D for IDU Main and /12B for IDU EXT.) Ref. Fig. 2.38 A B F G C-H D-I E-L Denomination BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) (for 3+1 only) Controller unit Alarm Restitution unit Fan unit Base accessories (Note 1) Base accessories (Note 2) N+1 base accessories (Note 3) Note 1: Quantity 1 for 2+1 and quantity 2 for 3+1. Note 2: Quantity 1 for 2+1 and quantity 0 for 3+1. Note 3: These accessories include the cables for the E-link and B-link. P/N 612-314/06 612-314/06 612-314/06 612-314/06 634-001/02 614-104/66 614-041/17 597-525/22 597-525/21 597-525/57 P/N 612-314/07 612-314/07 612-314/07 612-314/07 634-001/02 614-104/66 614-041/17 597-525/22 597-525/21 597-525/57

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.38 N+1 (2+1/3+1) SRA4 IDU systems Indoor assembly
A
IDU MAIN unit
Alarms
IDU Key I O
U n. F A N
U V11 S E R
WST G703 In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
PS IF
CHACHB
U V11 G703 S E R
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
PS
F
IDU EXT unit
Alarms
IDU Key I O
U n. F A N
U V11 S E R
WST G703 In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
PS IF
CHACHB
U V11 S E R
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
PS

2 - PLANNING

2.3.3.3 Licence fees
The Licence key" (P/N 625-017/64) includes a memory, called "Memory Key", configured with the Licence required by the Customer. The last digits of the P/N describe the configurations enabled on the equipment, according to the Tab. 2.61. Tab. 2.61 Licence key P/Ns Base code 625-017/64 625-017/64 625-017/64 625-017/64 625-017/64 625-017/64 Ext. 000 010 011 100 110 111 Description License fee for STM-1 ND AP License fee for STM-1 HD AP License fee for 2xSTM-1 HD AP License fee for STM-1 ND CC License fee for STM-1 HD CC License fee for 2xSTM-1 HD CC SRA4 IDU SRA4 IDU STM1
Note: The licence with higher extension code includes also the facility of the licences with a lower extension code.
2.3.3.4
Upgrading kits for on-field upgrading of the licence types

The "Upgrading kit" (P/N 625-018/14 xxx) includes a "Program Hardware Key", equipped with Licence Credits. Tab. 2.62 lists the list of the available upgrading kit.
Tab. 2.62
Upgrading kit P/Ns Base code 625-018/14 625-018/14 Ext. 100 010 Description SW licence upgrading from AP to CC SW licence upgrading from ND to HD

2 - PLANNING

2.3.4 Outdoor assembly composition (ODU)
ODU is available in 2 versions: ODU AP for AP channelling (Fig. 2.39): par. 2.3.4.1. These ODUs are installed on the supporting frames of par. 2.3.7. ODU AP/CC for AP and CC channelling (Fig. 2.40): par. 2.3.4.2. These ODUs are installed on the supporting frames of par. 2.3.7.
2.3.4.1
ODU AP
2.3.4.1.1 7 GHz ODU

The ODU composition is shown in Tab. 2.63. The complete list of the available ODUs is shown in par. 2.2.7.3. Tab. 2.63 7 GHz - ODU Composition ODU P/N (Note 1) Made up of: Denomination Group 7 GHz ODU 128 Diplexer 7 GHz (Note 2) P/N 735-201/07A 527-705/26 527-705/27 527-705/31 527-705/35 527-705/36 527-705/38
735-201/07-xxx
Note 1: The ODU has a 3-digit extension P/N with the following meaning: 1st digit: shows the channeling (shifter) + main/inter. 2nd and 3rd digits: show the RF channel and the mounting of the filter, which differs according to the operating frequency of the transmitter (lower or higher half-band). Should the 2nd digit be less than 5 it means that the Transmitter operates on the lower half-band. Should the 2nd digit be greater or equal to 5 it means that the Transmitter operates on the higher half-band.
Note 2: In every ODU is installed a duplexer which has a different P/N according to the RF channeling (refer to par. 2.2.7.3).

2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.1.2 8 GHz ODU
The ODU composition is shown in Tab. 2.64. The complete list of the available ODUs is shown in par. 2.2.7.4. Tab. 2.64 8 GHz - ODU Composition ODU P/N (Note 1) Made up of: Denomination Group 8 GHz ODU 128 Diplexer 8 GHz (Note 2) 735-201/08-xxx P/N 735-201/08A 527-705/61 527-705/62 527-705/66 527-705/67 527-705/70 527-705/71 527-705/73 527-705/74

2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.1.3 10 GHz ODU
The ODU composition is shown in Tab. 2.66. Tab. 2.65 10 GHz - ODU composition ODU P/N (Note 1) Made up of: Denomination Group 10 GHz ODU 128 Tx lower half-band or 735-201/10-xxx Group 10 GHz ODU 128 Tx higher half-band Duplexer 10 GHz (Nota 2) P/N 735-201/10L oppure 735-201/10H 527-904/92
Note 1: The ODU has a 3-digit extension P/N with the following meaning: 1st digit: shows the channeling (shifter) + main/inter. 2nd digit: differs according to the operating frequency of the transmitter (0 for lower half-band or 1 for higher half-band)
3rd digit: duplexer filter on the lower part of the half-band (0) or on the higher part of the half-band (1). The complete list of the available ODUs is shown in par. 2.2.7.5 Note 2: In every ODU is installed a duplexer which has a different 3-digit extension P/N according to the RF channeling (refer to par. 2.2.7.5).

2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.1.4 11 GHz ODU
The ODU composition is shown in Tab. 2.66. Tab. 2.66 11 GHz - ODU composition ODU P/N (Note 1) Made up of: Denomination Group 11 GHz ODU 128 Tx lower half-band or 735-201/11-xxx Group 11 GHz ODU 128 Tx higher half-band Duplexer 11 GHz (Note 2) Note 1: The ODU has a 3-digit extension P/N with the following meaning: 1st digit: shows the channeling (shifter) + main/inter. 2nd digit: differs according to the operating frequency of the transmitter (0 for lower half-band or 1 for higher half-band) P/N 735-201/11L or 735-201/11H 527-904/84

2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.1.5 13 GHz ODU
The ODU composition is shown in Tab. 2.67. Tab. 2.67 13 GHz - ODU composition ODU P/N (Note 1) 735-201/13-xxx Made up of: Denomination 13 GHz ODU 128 group 13 GHz Duplexer (Note 2) P/N 735-201/13A 527-904/74

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.39 Outdoor assembly (AP)
FRONT VIEW FEEDER FLANGE
RX FIELD MEASUREMENT CONNECTOR
PC INTERFACE CONNECTOR (factory use)
GROUND CABLE
IN/OUT IF CABLE CONNECTOR TOP VIEW BOTTOM VIEW

2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.2 ODU AP/CC 2.3.4.2.1 ODU 6 GHz
The ODU composition is shown in Tab. 2.68. Tab. 2.68 6 GHz - ODU Composition ODU P/N (Note 1) Made up of: Denomination Group 6 GHz ODU 128 Tx lower half-band (6L) or Group 6 GHz ODU 128 Tx higher half-band (6U) 735-211/06-xxx Duplexer 6 GHz (6L) or Duplexer 6 GHz (6U) (Note 2) Note 1: The ODU has a 3-digit extension P/N with the following meaning: 1st digit: shows the channeling (shifter) + main/inter. 2nd digit: differs according to the operating frequency of the transmitter (0 for lower half-band or 5 for higher half-band) P/N 735-211/06 or 735-211/06
527-703/57 or 527-703/58
3rd digit: duplexer filter on the lower part of the half-band (0) or on the higher part of the half-band (1). The complete list of the available ODUs is shown in par. 2.2.7.1 and par. 2.2.7.2
Note 2: In every ODU is installed a duplexer which has a different 3-digit extension P/N according to the RF channeling (refer to par. 2.2.7.1 and par. 2.2.7.2).

2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.2.2 7 GHz ODU
The ODU composition is shown in Tab. 2.69. The complete list of the available ODUs is shown in par. 2.2.7.3. Tab. 2.69 7 GHz - ODU Composition ODU P/N (Note 1) Made up of: Denomination Group 7 GHz ODU 128 Diplexer 7 GHz (Note 2) P/N 735-211/07A 527-705/26 527-705/27 527-705/31 527-705/35 527-705/36 527-705/38
735-211/07-xxx

2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.2.3 8 GHz ODU
The ODU composition is shown in Tab. 2.70. The complete list of the available ODUs is shown in par. 2.2.7.4. Tab. 2.70 8 GHz - ODU Composition ODU P/N (Note 1) Made up of: Denomination Group 8 GHz ODU 128 Diplexer 8 GHz (Note 2) 735-211/08-xxx P/N 735-211/08A 527-705/61 527-705/62 527-705/65 527-705/66 527-705/67 527-705/70 527-705/71 527-705/73 527-705/74

2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.2.4 11 GHz ODU
The ODU composition is shown in Tab. 2.71. Tab. 2.71 11 GHz - ODU composition ODU P/N (Note 1) Made up of: Denomination Group 11 GHz ODU 128 Tx lower half-band or 735-211/11-xxx Group 11 GHz ODU 128 Tx higher half-band Duplexer 11 GHz (Note 2) Note 1: The ODU has a 3-digit extension P/N with the following meaning: 1st digit: shows the channeling (shifter) + main/inter. 2nd digit: differs according to the operating frequency of the transmitter (0 for lower half-band or 1 for higher half-band) P/N 735-211/11L or 735-211/11H 527-904/84

2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.2.5 13 GHz ODU
The ODU composition is shown in Tab. 2.72. Tab. 2.72 13 GHz - ODU composition ODU P/N (Note 1) 735-211/13-xxx Made up of: Denomination 13 GHz ODU 128 group 13 GHz Duplexer (Note 2) P/N 735-211/13A 527-904/74

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.40 Outdoor assembly (AP/CC )
FRONT VIEW FEEDER FLANGE
367
RX FIELD MEASUREMENT CONNECTOR RF LO CO-CHANNEL CONNECTOR
GROUND CABLE CONNECTION POINT PC INTERFACE CONNECTOR (factory use)
324
RF LO CO-CHANNEL CONNECTOR TOP VIEW BOTTOM VIEW
IN/OUT IF CABLE CONNECTOR
In the 6 GHz ODU connector IF LO CO-CHANNEL is not used, because in Rx side the conversion is directly from RF to 140 MHz.

202
2 - PLANNING

2.3.5 IDU/ODU cable
Two different types of cable can be used: 3/10 50 ohm coaxial cable 1/4 50 ohm coaxial cable refer to par. 2.3.5.1 refer to par. 2.3.5.2
The standard delivery includes the 3/10 coaxial cable and the max. length of the IDU/ODU connection is 190 m. The 1/4 coaxial cable is delivered on demand and the max. length of the IDU/ODU connection is 250 m.
2.3.5.1
3/10 50 ohm coaxial cable

Refer to Fig. 2.41. The 3/10 coaxial cable can be produced by two different manufacturers (Andrew and Intercond).
Tab. 2.73
Andrew cable set P/N 104-009/50 597-525/78A Description 3/10 CNT300 - 50 ohm coaxial cable 3/10 Braided coax cable accessories 421-008/38 421-008/35 333-031/21 coax N-plug 90 coax N-plug grounding kit 1 1 1 Q.ty
Tab. 2.74
Intercond cable set P/N 104-009/51 597-525/78B Description CF 3/10l3 ICN48 - 50 ohm coaxial cable 3/10 Braided coax cable accessories 421-008/39 421-008/36 333-021/22 coax N-plug 90 coax N-plug grounding kit 1 1 1 Q.ty

2 - PLANNING

2.3.5.2 1/4 50 ohm coaxial cable
Refer to Fig. 2.41. Tab. 2.75 Andrew cable set P/N 104-009/42 597-523/94A Description 1/4 LDF1RN - 50 ohm coaxial cable 1/4 coax cable accessories L1PNM-HC L1PNR-HC CSGL1-10B2 N type coax plug 90 N type coax N-plug grounding kit 421-008/88 421-008/84 333-031/19 1 1 1 Q.ty

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.41 3/10 or 1/4 coaxial cable
(a) TO ODU SECTION 3/10 or 1/4 COAXIAL CABLE
OSM/N COAXIAL TAIL (L.=1 Mt.) (314-327/91)
COAXIAL N-PLUG
(b)
COAXIAL CABLE FIXING BRACKET (232-124/20) OSM/N COAXIAL TAIL (L.=1 Mt.) (314-327/91)
(a)
TO IDU SECTION (a) = This material is included in the base connection elements (1+0) 597-525/21, (1+1) 597-525/22 or (1+0>1+1) 597-525/33. (b) = This material is included in the fixing accessories 332-011/35, included in the base connection element 597-525/21 and 597-525/22.

2 - PLANNING

2.3.6 ODU coaxial connections for the CO-CHANNEL
Cable connections between two ODU's must be realised only when the equipment is CC configured: 2+0 CC, 2x(1+1) FD CC or 2x(1+1) HSBY CC.
2.3.6.1
2+0 CC configuration connections

The connections must be made as specified in Fig. 2.42.
Fig. 2.42
Connection diagram between the AP/CC ODUs for CC configuration

FLEX WG FLEX WG
V H
ODU 1
RF LO COAX CABLE RF LO Conn. IF LO COAX CABLE
(Note)
ODU 2
RF LO Conn.
IF LO Conn.
IF LO Conn.
IF COAX CABLE
IF COAX CABLE
TO/FROM IDU
TO/FROM IDU
Note: This connection is not implemented in the 6 GHz AP/CC ODU.

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.43 Connection diagram between the ODUs
Antenna side
IF LO coaxial cable (Note)
Antenna side
ODU AP/CC 1 TOP VIEW
Antenna side
RF LO coaxial cable
Antenna side
ODU AP/CC 1 BOTTOM VIEW
Note: This connection is not implemented in the 6 GHz ODU.

2 - PLANNING

2.3.6.2 2x(1+1) FD CC configuration connections (with one antenna)
The connections must be made as specified in Fig. 2.44. Fig. 2.44 Connection diagram between the ODUs for CC configuration (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna)
Flexible W.G.
V H
ODU 1 (CH1) V pol.

RF LO Conn. IF LO Conn. IF Loc. Osc. coax. cable (Note) RF Loc. Osc. coax. cable
ODU 3 (CH1) H pol.

RF LO Conn. IF LO Conn.
RF HYBRID
IF Coax Cable
IF Coax Cable
RF HYBRID
Flexible W.G.
ODU 2 (CH2) V pol.
RF Loc. Osc. coax. cable IF Loc. Osc. coax. cable (Note)
ODU 4 (CH2) H pol.
IF Coax Cable
BB.1 1st IDU (1+1) BB.2
IF Coax Cable
XPIC Connections
XPIC Connections
IF Coax Cable
IF Coax Cable
BB.1 2nd IDU (1+1) BB.2
XPIC Connections
XPIC Connections

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.45 IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna)
RF HYBR. V Pol. SIDE
RF HYBR. H Pol. SIDE
AP/CC ODU 1 TOP SIDE VIEW
IF LO coaxial cable (Note) RF HYBR. V Pol. SIDE RF HYBR. H Pol. SIDE
1st (1+1) ODU system
2nd (1+1) ODU system

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.46 RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna)
RF LO coaxial cable RF HYBR. H Pol. SIDE
AP/CC ODU 1 BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
RF LO coaxial cable RF HYBR. V Pol. SIDE RF HYBR. H Pol. SIDE
2nd (1+1) ODU system

2 - PLANNING

2.3.6.3 2x(1+1) FD CC configuration connections (with two antennas)
The connections must be made as specified in Fig. 2.47. Fig. 2.47 Connection diagram between the ODUs for CC configuration (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas)
Flexible W.G.
1st System
V H
Flexible W.G.
ODU 1 (CH1) V-pol.

RF LO Conn. IF Loc. Osc. coax. cable (note) RF Loc. Osc. coax. cable
ODU 3 (CH1) H-pol.

RF LO Conn.
IF LO Conn.
IF LO Conn.
IF Coax Cable
IF Coax Cable
2nd System
Flexible W.G.
H V
Flexible W.G.
ODU 2 (CH2) H-pol.

RF LO Conn. IF Loc. Osc. coax. cable (note) IF LO Conn. RF Loc. Osc. coax. cable
ODU 3 (CH2) V-pol.

RF LO Conn.
IF LO Conn.
IF Coax Cable
IF Coax Cable
BB.1 st IDU 1+1) BB.2
XPIC Connections
XPIC Connections IF Coax Cable IF Coax Cable
BB.1 nd IDU 1+1) BB.2
XPIC Connections
XPIC Connections

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.48 IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas)
RF C.P. Filter V Pol. SIDE
IF LO coaxial cable (Note) RF C.P. Filter H Pol. SIDE
RF C.P. Filter H Pol. SIDE
IF LO coaxial cable (Note) RF C.P. Filter V Pol. SIDE
AP/CC ODU 2 TOP SIDE VIEW 2 nd (1+1) ODU system

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.49 RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas)
RF LO coaxial cable RF C.P. Filter V Pol. SIDE RF C.P. Filter H Pol. SIDE
RF LO coaxial cable RF C.P. Filter H Pol. SIDE RF C.P. Filter V Pol. SIDE
2 nd (1+1) ODU system

2 - PLANNING

2.3.6.4 2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC configuration connections
The connections must be made as specified in Fig. 2.44. Fig. 2.50 Connection diagram between the ODUs for CC configuration (2x(1+1) Hot Standby)
Flexible W.G. V H
ODU 1 (MAIN) V pol.

RF LO Conn. IF Loc. Osc. coax. cable (Note) RF Loc. Osc. coax. cable
ODU 3 (MAIN H pol.

RF LO Conn.
IF LO Conn.
IF LO Conn.
IF Coax Cable RF COUPLER
IF Coax Cable
Flexible W.G.
RF COUPLER
ODU 2 (STBY) V pol.
RF Loc. Osc. coax. cable
ODU 4 (CH2) STBY
IF Loc. Osc. coax. cable (Note)
IF Coax Cable
BB.1 1st IDU (1+1) BB.2
IF Coax Cable
XPIC Connections
XPIC Connections
IF Coax Cable
IF Coax Cable
BB.1 2nd IDU (1+1) BB.2
XPIC Connections
XPIC Connections

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.51 IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) Hot Standby)
RF COUPLER V Pol. SIDE
RF COUPLER H Pol. SIDE
IF LO coaxial cable (Note) RF COUPLER V Pol. SIDE RF COUPLER H Pol. SIDE
1st (1+1) HSBYODU system
2nd (1+1) HSBY ODU system

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.52 RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) Hot Standby)
RF LO coaxial cable RF COUPLER V Pol. SIDE RF COUPLER H Pol. SIDE

2 - PLANNING

2.3.7
2.3.7.1
Supporting frames (AP and AP/CC ODU)

1+0 Supporting frame
Refer to Fig. 2.53, Fig. 2.54 and Tab. 2.76. The 1+0 supporting frame consists of a mechanical structure, and relevant waveguide accessories, suitable for pole or wall mounting of the Outdoor Unit in 1+0 configuration. From an electrical point of view the frame is a passive device (i.e. waveguide section) that provides interconnection between its two ports with negligible insertion loss.
Fig. 2.53
1+0 Supporting frame
ODU
waveguide Frame
Tab. 2.76 Code 534-114/06 534-114/07 534-114/07 534-114/10 534-114/11 534-114/13
1+0 Supporting frame ODU TYPE AP/CC AP or AP/CC AP or AP/CC AP AP or AP/CC AP or AP/CC Freq. Range (GHz) 5.6 - 7.1 7.1 - 7.9 8.2 - 8.5 10.0 - 11.7 10.7 - 11.7 12.7 - 13.3 W.G. Type WR137 R70 WR112 R84 WR112 R84 WR90 R100 WR90 R100 WR75 R120 Port A Flange type UDR70 UDR84 UDR84 UDR100 UDR100 UDR120 Port B Flange type PDR70 PDR84 PDR84 PDR100 PDR100 PDR120
Freq. Band (GHz) 6L/6U 7 8 10 11 13

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.54 1+0 Supporting frame
POLE 115 mm
1+0 FRAME
ODU

2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.2 1+1 Supporting frames for Hot stand-by 2.3.7.2.1 Balanced frame
Refer to Fig. 2.55, Fig. 2.57 and Tab. 2.77. The 1+1 supporting frame for Hot Stand-by consists of a mechanical structure, and relevant waveguide accessories, suitable for pole or wall mounting of the two Outdoor Units in 1+1 HSBY (Hot Stand-by) balanced configuration. From an electrical point of view the 1+1 frame for balanced configuration is a 1:1 coupler. The signal incoming from the antenna port is split balanced-wise toward the two ODUs.
Fig. 2.55
1+1 Balanced supporting frame for Hot Standby
ODU
C
ODU
Hybrid
Frame
Tab. 2.77 Code 534-113/06 534-113/07 534-113/07 534-113/10 534-113/11 534-113/13
1+1 Balanced supporting frame for Hot Standby ODU TYPE AP/CC AP or AP/CC AP or AP/CC AP AP or AP/CC AP or AP/CC Freq. Range (GHz) 5.6 - 7.1 7.1 - 7.9 8.2 - 8.5 10.0 - 11.7 10.7 - 11.7 12.7 - 13.3 W.G. Type WR137 R70 WR112 R84 WR112 R84 WR90 R100 WR90 R100 WR75 R120 Port A Flange type UDR70 UDR84 UDR84 UDR100 UDR100 UDR120 Port B,C Flange type PDR70 PDR84 PDR84 PDR100 PDR100 PDR120
Freq. Band (GHz) 6L/6U 7 8 10 11 13

2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.2.2 Unbalanced frame
Refer to Fig. 2.56, Fig. 2.57 and Tab. 2.78. The 1+1 supporting frame for Hot Stand-by consists of a mechanical structure, and relevant waveguide accessories, suitable for pole or wall mounting of the two Outdoor Units in 1+1 HSBY (Hot Stand-by) unbalanced configuration. From an electrical point of view the 1+1 frame for unbalanced configuration is a 10:1 coupler. The signal incoming from the antenna port is split unbalanced-wise the two ODUs.
Fig. 2.56
1+1 Supporting unbalanced frame for Hot Standby
ODU
C
ODU
Coupler
Frame
Tab. 2.78 Code 534-112/06 534-112/07 534-112/07 534-112/10 534-112/11 534-112/13
1+1 Supporting unbalanced frame for Hot Standby ODU TYPE AP/CC AP or AP/CC AP or AP/CC AP AP or AP/CC AP or AP/CC Freq. Range (GHz) 5.6 - 7.1 7.1 - 7.9 8.2 - 8.5 10.0 - 11.7 10.7 - 11.7 12.7 - 13.3 W.G. Type WR137 R70 WR112 R84 WR112 R84 WR90 R100 WR90 R100 WR75 R120 Port A Flange type UDR70 UDR84 UDR84 UDR100 UDR100 UDR120 Port B,C Flange type PDR70 PDR84 PDR84 PDR100 PDR100 PDR120
Freq. Band (GHz) 6L/6U 7 8 10 11 13

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.57 1+1 Supporting frame
POLE 115 mm
1+1 FRAME
ODU ODU

2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.3 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity
The 1+1 supporting frame from frequency diversity consists of a mechanical structure, and relevant waveguide accessories, suitable for pole or wall mounting of two Outdoor Units in 1+1 Frequency Diversity configuration. The two ODUs are interconnected to the antenna port through a circulator. Both the ODUs transmit at the same time, delivering the signal on two RF channels at different frequecies on the same polarisation (Co-polar) or on different polarisation (Cross-polar).
Fig. 2.58
1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Co-polar)
ODU
C
ODU
Circulator
Frame
Tab. 2.79 Code 534-115/06 534-115/07 534-115/07
1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Co-polar) ODU TYPE AP/CC AP or AP/CC AP or AP/CC Freq. Range (GHz) 5.6-7.1 7.1-7.9 8.2-8.5 Guide type WR137 R70 WR112 R84 WR112 R84 Port A Flange type UDR70 UDR84 UDR84 Port B,C Flange type PDR70 PDR84 PDR84
Freq. Band (GHz) 6L/6U 7 8

2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.59 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Cross-polar)
ODU
B A1
A2 C
ODU
Frame
Tab. 2.80 Code 534-116/06 534-116/07 534-116/07 534-116/11 534-116/13
1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Cross-polar) ODU TYPE AP/CC AP or AP/CC AP or AP/CC AP or AP/CC AP or AP/CC Freq. Range (GHz) 5.6 - 7.1 7.1 - 7.9 8.2 - 8.5 10.7 - 11.7 12.7 - 13.3 W.G. Type WR137 R70 WR112 R84 WR112 R84 WR90 R100 WR75 R120 Ports A1, A2 Flange type UDR70 UDR84 UDR84 UDR100 UDR120 Ports B, C Flange type PDR70 PDR84 PDR84 PDR100 PDR120
Freq. Band (GHz) 6L/6U 7 8 11 13

2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.4 Supporting frames for N+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) (6U/6L, 7 and 8 GHz)
2.3.7.4.1 Supporting frames for 2+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP)
Refer to Fig. 2.60, Tab. 2.81 and Tab. 2.82. The 2+1 configuration needs two supporting frames: Fig. 2.60 one 1+0 supporting frame (ref. to par. 2.3.7.1 and Fig. 2.54). one 1+1 supporting frame for Frequency Diversity (Co-polar) ref. to par. 2.3.7.3.
Supporting frames for 2+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP)

C 1+1 FD co-polar frame A B
1st ODU 2nd ODU

1+0 frame B Circulator
Frame
3th ODU
waveguide
Tab. 2.81 Code 534-114/06 534-114/07 534-114/07
1+0 Supporting frame ODU TYPE AP/CC AP or AP/CC AP or AP/CC Freq. Range (GHz) 5,6 - 7,1 7,1 - 7,9 8,2 - 8,5 W.G. Type WR137 R70 WR112 R84 WR112 R84 Port A Flange type UDR70 UDR84 UDR84 Port B Flange type PDR70 PDR84 PDR84
Tab. 2.82 Code 534-115/06 534-115/07 534-115/07

2 - PLANNING

Refer to Fig. 2.61 and Tab. 2.83. The 3+1 configuration needs two supporting frames for Frequency Diversity (Co-polar) (ref. to par. 2.3.7.3) Fig. 2.61 Supporting frames for 3+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP)
1 ODU
st
2nd ODU
C
Circulator
Frame
1+1 FD co-polar frame A
3th ODU
B
4th ODU
Circulator
Tab. 2.83 Code 534-115/06 534-115/07 534-115/07

2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.5 Supporting frames for N+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) (10, 11 and 13 GHz)
Refer to Fig. 2.62, Tab. 2.84 and Tab. 2.85. The 2+1 configuration needs two supporting frames as follow: Fig. 2.62 one 1+0 supporting frame (ref. to par. 2.3.7.1 and Fig. 2.54).. one 1+1 balanced supporting frame (the same used for Hot-Standby ref. to par. 2.3.7.2.1 and Fig. 2.57)
Supporting frames for 2+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP)

C
1+1 Balanced supporting frame

A
1st ODU
B
2nd ODU
B
Hybrid
Frame
1+0 supporting frame

A
3th ODU
waveguide
Tab. 2.84 Code 534-114/10 534-114/11 534-114/13
1+0 Supporting frame ODU TYPE AP AP or AP/CC AP or AP/CC Freq. Range (GHz) 10,0 - 11,7 10,7 - 11,7 12,7 - 13,3 W.G. Type WR90 R100 WR90 R100 WR75 R120 Port A Flange type UDR100 UDR100 UDR120 Port B Flange type PDR100 PDR100 PDR120
Freq. Band (GHz) 10 11 13
Tab. 2.85 Code 534-113/10 534-113/11 534-113/13
1+1 Balanced supporting frame ODU TYPE AP AP or AP/CC AP or AP/CC Freq. Range (GHz) 10,0 - 11,7 10,7 - 11,7 12,7 - 13,3 W.G. Type WR90 R100 WR90 R100 WR75 R120 Port A Flange type UDR100 UDR100 UDR120 Port B,C Flange type PDR100 PDR100 PDR120

2 - PLANNING

Refer to Fig. 2.63 and Tab. 2.86. The 3+1 configuration needs two 1+1 balanced supporting frames (the same used for Hot-Standby - ref. to par. 2.3.7.2.1 and Fig. 2.57) Fig. 2.63 Supporting frames for 3+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP)
C

A
1st ODU
B
2nd ODU
C
Hybrid
Frame

A
3th ODU
B
4th ODU
Hybrid
Tab. 2.86 Code 534-113/10 534-113/11 534-113/13
1+1 Balanced supporting frame ODU TYPE AP AP or AP/CC AP or AP/CC Freq. Range (GHz) 10,0 - 11,7 10,7 - 11,7 12,7 - 13,3 W.G. Type WR90 R100 WR90 R100 WR75 R120 Port A Flange type UDR100 UDR100 UDR120 Port B,C Flange type PDR100 PDR100 PDR120

2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.6 Supporting frames for Co-Channel FD configuration 2.3.7.6.1 Supporting frames for (2+0) Co-Channel FD configuration
Refer to Fig. 2.64 and Tab. 2.87. The 2+0 configuration needs two 1+0 supporting frames (ref. to par. 2.3.7.1 and Fig. 2.54).
Fig. 2.64
Supporting frames for (2+0) Co-Channel FD configuration 1+0 supporting frame

B A
ODU
waveguide Frame
1+0 supporting frame

B A
ODU
waveguide
Tab. 2.87 Code 534-114/06 534-114/07 534-114/07 534-114/11 534-114/13
1+0 Supporting frame ODU TYPE AP/CC AP/CC AP/CC AP/CC AP/CC Freq. Range (GHz) 5,6 - 7,1 7,1 - 7,9 8,2 - 8,5 10,7 - 11,7 12,7 - 13,3 W.G. Type WR137 R70 WR112 R84 WR112 R84 WR90 R100 WR75 R120 Port A Flange type UDR70 UDR84 UDR84 UDR100 UDR120 Port B Flange type PDR70 PDR84 PDR84 PDR100 PDR120

2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.6.2 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with one antenna) - ODU 6L/6U, 7 and 8 GHz
Refer to Fig. 2.65 and Tab. 2.88. The 2x(1+1) configuration needs two supporting frames for Frequency Diversity (Co-polar) (ref. to par. 2.3.7.3) Fig. 2.65 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with one antenna)
1st ODU 2nd ODU

C
Circulator
Frame
1+1 FD co-polar frame A
3th ODU
B
4th ODU
Circulator
Tab. 2.88 Code 534-115/06 534-115/07 534-115/07
1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Co-polar) ODU TYPE AP/CC AP/CC AP/CC Freq. Range (GHz) 5.6-7.1 7.1-7.9 8.2-8.5 Guide type WR137 R70 WR112 R84 WR112 R84 Port A Flange type UDR70 UDR84 UDR84 Port B,C Flange type PDR70 PDR84 PDR84

2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.6.3 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with one antenna) - ODU 11 GHz and 13 GHz
Refer to Fig. 2.66 and Tab. 2.89. The 2x(1+1) configuration needs two 1+1 balanced supporting frames (the same used for Hot-Standby - ref. to par. 2.3.7.2.1 and Fig. 2.57) Fig. 2.66 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with one antenna)
C

A
1st ODU
B
2nd ODU
C
Hybrid
Frame

A
3th ODU
B
4th ODU
Tab. 2.89 Code 534-113/11 534-113/13
Hybrid
1+1 Balanced supporting frame ODU TYPE AP/CC AP/CC Freq. Range (GHz) 10,7 - 11,7 12,7 - 13,3 W.G. Type WR90 R100 WR75 R120 Port A Flange type UDR100 UDR120 Port B,C Flange type PDR100 PDR120
Freq. Band (GHz) 11 13

2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.6.4 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with two antennas)
Refer to Fig. 2.67 and Tab. 2.90. The 2x(1+1) configuration need two supporting frames for Frequency Diversity (Cross-polar) (ref. to par. 2.3.7.5.) Fig. 2.67 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with two antennas)
1st ODU
B A1 1+1 FD cross-polar frame
A2
3th ODU 2nd ODU

B
A1 1+1 FD cross-polar frame
A2
4th ODU
Frame

2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.90 Code 534-116/06 534-116/07 534-116/07 534-116/11 534-116/13 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Cross-polar) ODU TYPE AP/CC AP/CC AP/CC AP/CC AP/CC Freq. Range (GHz) 5,6 - 7,1 7,1 - 7,9 8,2 - 8,5 10,7 - 11,7 12,7 - 13,3 W.G. Type WR137 R70 WR112 R84 WR112 R84 WR90 R100 WR75 R120 Ports A1, A2 Flange type UDR70 UDR84 UDR84 UDR100 UDR120 Ports B, C Flange type PDR70 PDR84 PDR84 PDR100 PDR120 Freq. Band (GHz) 6L/6U 7 8 11 13

2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.7 Supporting frames for Co-Channel Hot Standby configuration 2.3.7.7.1 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel Hot Standby configuration - ODU 6, 7, 8, 11 and 13 GHz
Refer to Fig. 2.68 and Tab. 2.91. The 2x(1+1) configuration needs two 1+1 unbalanced supporting frames - ref. to par. 2.3.7.2.2 and Fig. 2.57) Fig. 2.68 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel Hot Standby configuration
B
1+1 Unbalanced supporting frame

A
1st ODU
C
2nd ODU
B
Coupler
Frame
1+1 Unbalanced supporting frame

A
3th ODU
C
4th ODU
Coupler
Tab. 2.91 Code 534-112/06 534-112/07 534-112/07 534-112/11 534-112/13
1+1 Supporting unbalanced frame for Hot Standby ODU TYPE AP/CC AP/CC AP/CC AP/CC AP/CC Freq. Range (GHz) 5.6 - 7.1 7.1 - 7.9 8.2 - 8.5 10.7 - 11.7 12.7 - 13.3 W.G. Type WR137 R70 WR112 R84 WR112 R84 WR90 R100 WR75 R120 Port A Flange type UDR70 UDR84 UDR84 UDR100 UDR120 Port B,C Flange type PDR70 PDR84 PDR84 PDR100 PDR120

2 - PLANNING

LA
PA G E
3 - INSTALLATION
3 INSTALLATION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF THE RACK ETSI
3.1.1 View of the rack ETSI
Fig. 3.1 shows the rack ETSI with the relevant overall dimensions, Fig. 3.2 shows the general dimensions for the operation and Tab. 3.1 lists the types of rack ETSI. The weight of the empty rack is approximately 57 Kg. The dimensions are pointed out by means of millimeters. Fig. 3.1 View of the rack ETSI with overall dimensions

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.2 General dimensions for the rack ETSI operation

3 - INSTALLATION

Tab. 3.1 Rack ETSI list CODE 301-021/01 301-021/02 301-021/31 627-65/001 627-65/002 627-65/003 627-65/005 627-65/011 627-65/012 HEIGHT mm 2200 2200 1800 2200 2200 2200 1800 2200 2200 COLOUR Grey RAL 7001 Sand RAL 7032 Sand RAL 7032 Grey RAL 7001 Sand RAL 7032 Sand RAL 7032 Sand RAL 7032 Grey RAL 7001 Sand RAL 7032 CABLE SUPPORT AND OPTICAL FIBER DUCT NO NO NO NO NO NO (*) NO YES YES
(*) = Provided only with SRT 1C (it is a version equipped with support and protection of the antenna circulators).
3.1.2
3.1.2.1
Drilling planes
In-line installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame
Fig. 3.3 and Fig. 3.4 show the fixing of the rack upper and lower parts.

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.3 Fixing of the lower part: floor drilling plane
Key: 1. 2. 3. 4. Rack ETSI Floor hole 14mm N 2 self-locking blocks M8 (code 203-360/04) provided into the fixing kit (333-043/81), for the installation procedure refer to Fig. 3.10 The pipe wrench with size 13mm has to be provided by the installation operator
* = Act on the levelling groups through an hexagonal bar wrench with size 6 mm to get the angular adjustment of the rack.

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.4 Fixing of the upper part
Key: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Rack ETSI Eyebolt (Standard) to be removed N 2 fixing plates (code 224-015/64) provided into the fixing kit (333-043/81) N 4 hexagonal head screws M10x30 (code 203-346/18D) provided into the fixing kit (333-043/81) N 4 flat washers (333-043/81)
10,5 (cod. 207-510/13D) provided into the fixing kit
The pipe wrench with size 1719 mm has to be provided by the installation operator.

3 - INSTALLATION

3.1.2.2 Back-to-back installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame
Fig. 3.5 e Fig. 3.6 show the fixing of the rack upper and lower parts. Fig. 3.5 Fixing of the lower part: floor drilling plane
Key: 1. 2. 3. 4. Rack ETSI Floor hole 14mm N 2 self-locking blocks M8 (code 203-360/04) provided into the fixing kit (333-043/81), for the installation procedure refer to Fig. 3.8 The pipe wrench with size 13mm has to be provided by the installation operator
* = Act on the levelling groups through an hexagonal bar wrench with size 6 mm to get the angular adjustment of the rack.

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.6 Fixing of the upper part
Key: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Rack ETSI Eyebolt (Standard) to be removed N 2 fixing plates (code 224-015/64) provided into the fixing kit (333-043/81) N 4 hexagonal head screws M10x30 (code 203-346/18D) provided into the fixing kit (333-043/81) N 4 flat washers (333-043/81)
The pipe wrench with size 1719 mm has to be provided by the installation operator.

3 - INSTALLATION

3.1.2.3 Wall installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame
Fig. 3.7 show the fixing of the rack upper part. Fig. 3.7 Fixing of the lower part: floor drilling plane
Do not fix the rack one each other in their upper part by means of the plates (code 224-015/64) Key: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Rack ETSI N 2 wall fixing plates (code 232-334/77) provided into the fixing kit (333-043/81) N 2 flat washers (333-043/81)
N 2 hexagonal head screws M10x30 (code 203-346/18D) provided into the fixing kit (333-043/81) The pipe wrench with size 1719 mm has to be provided by the installation operator Floor hole 9 mm N 2 expandable blocks M5 (cod. 165-010/08) provided into the fixing kit (333-043/81) The medium screwdriver has to be provided by the installation operator.

3 - INSTALLATION

3.1.2.4 In-line installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame on floating floor or on wall
Fig. 3.8 shows the drilling plane for the fixing of the Racks. The drilling point corresponding to the elliptic hole present on the fixing bracket depends on the position where it is installed the rack. The fixing material is an optional one and it has to be provided separately (refer to Tab. 3.2 and Tab. 3.3). Fig. 3.8 Drilling plane for the in-line fixing of the Rack ETSI on floating floor and on wall

3 - INSTALLATION

3.1.2.5 Back-to-back installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame on floating floor
Fig. 3.9 shows the drilling plane for the fixing of the Racks. The fixing material is an optional one and it has to be provided separately (refer to Tab. 3.2 and Tab. 3.3). Fig. 3.9 Drilling plane for the back-to-back fixing of the Rack ETSI on floating floor

3 - INSTALLATION

3.1.2.6 Characteristics and installation procedure of the self-locking bolts for floors
Fig. 3.10 shows the characteristics of the bolt and the corresponding installation procedure. N 2 of these bolts are provided with the fixing kit for the rack ETSI (333-043/81). Fig. 3.10 Characteristics and installation procedure of the self-locking bolt for floor

3 - INSTALLATION

3.1.2.7 Characteristics and installation procedure of the expansion bolts for walls
Fig. 3.11 shows the characteristics of the bolt and the corresponding installation procedure. N 2 of these bolts are provided with the fixing kit for the rack ETSI (333-043/81). Fig. 3.11 Characteristics and installation procedure of the self-locking bolt for walls

3 - INSTALLATION

3.1.3
3.1.3.1
Connections
Ground connections for the rack ETSI
Fig. 3.12 shows the ground connections relevant to the rack ETSI that have to be realized.
Fig. 3.12
Ground connections of the Rack ETSI
* = This ground cable is comprised into the ETSI rack (627-65/003)

3 - INSTALLATION

3.1.4 Composition of the fixing kit
Tab. 3.2 and Tab. 3.3 lists the fixing materials for racks ETSI. Tab. 3.2 Fixing kit for racks ETSI (333-043/81) OPTION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. CODE 203-360/04 165-010/04 224-015/64 203-346/18D 207-510/13D 232-334/77 147-016/02 147-101/12 DESCRIPTION SELF-LOCKING BOLTSM8 EXPANSION BOLTS M5 FIXING PLATE HEXAGONAL HEAD SCREWS M10x30 FLAT WASHERS 10,5 PLATE FOR WALL FIXING ANTI-STATIC ENVELOPE PAPERBOARD BOX M.U. Nr. Nr. Nr. Nr. Nr. Nr. Nr. Nr. Q.TY 2 2 2 4 4 2 1 1
Tab. 3.3
Fixing kit for racks ETSI for floating floors (Optional) (332-309/36) OPTION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. CODE 205-451/82 224-303/25 206-702/15D 207-505/12D 207-501/12D DESCRIPTION STAINLESS STEEL TIE ROD M8 ANCHORING BRACKET NUT M8 FLAT WASHER SPRING WASHER M.U. Nr. Nr. Nr. Nr. Nr. Q.TY 2 2 2 2 2
For the installation of the Racks ETSI on wooden floors, use n 2 screws M8x45; for the wall fixing, use wooden screws M5x25 to be bought on site.

3 - INSTALLATION
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
The equipment is made up by a BB assembly (IDU) that is housed into a ETSI type rack and by a transceiver (ODU) that is inserted into a box to be installed outdoor near the antenna. This paragraph contains the information necessary to make easier on site the installation procedures of the BB assembly (and eventually of the Q-Adapter unit if equipped) and of the power supply distribution panel inside the ETSI rack. It provides also the installation instructions of the ODU on the outdoor pole support (with or without antenna).
3.2.1
IDU installation in the ETSI rack

Insert the cage nuts into the square slots of the rack, on the desired positions. Fix the sub-rack by means of four screws M6x16. Connect the coaxial cables as pointed out into the par. 3.4 "EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS". The connection cables with the ODU are housed along the side wall of the rack.
3.2.2
3.2.2.1
ODU
General
In this paragraph all the operations are described, required for the mechanical installation of equipments. During the installation, while lifting the antenna and/or the outdoor pole supporting frame, it is strictly forbidden to stand or transit in the area below; the area has to be suitably delimited or signaled according to regulations in force. For the operations to be realized outside on antenna, frame, ODU, all the required safeties, according to the regulations in force, against accidental falls of the operators have to be observed like the presence ot railings, safety bolts, etc.
To lift the ODU use only the eyebolt shown in Fig. 3.13.

3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.2.2 ODU Layout
Fig. 3.13 shows the ODU (AP) (front view and top view). In the top view it is possible to see the connectors for the Rx field measurement and for the PC interface and the eyebolt which must be used to lift and to move the ODU. The eyebolt can be used also ax fixing point of the connection for the ground cable. The bottom view allows to see the IN/OUT connector of the IF cable. Fig. 3.13 shows the ODU (AP/CC) (front view and top view). In the top view it is possible to see the connectors for the Rx field measurement for the PC interface and IF-LO synch. co-channel connections. The bottom view allows to see the IN/OUT connector of the IF cable and RF-LO synch. co-channel connections.
3.2.2.3
Tab. 3.4
ODU flanges
ODU Flanges Frequency bands (GHz) 6 (5.9 - 7.1) 7 (7.1 - 7.9) 8 (8.2 - 8.5) 10 (10.0 - 11.7) 11 (10.7 - 11.7) 13 (12.7 - 13.3) Flange UDR 70 UDR 84 UDR 84 UDR 100 UDR 100 UDR 120

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.13 ODU (AP) layout
EYEBOLT
TOP VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW
IN/OUT CABLE CONNECTOR

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.14 ODU (AP/CC) Layout
IF-LO CO-CHANNEL SYNC CONNECTOR (Note)
TOP VIEW
IN/OUT CABLE CONNECTOR
RF-LO CO-CHANNEL SYNC CONNECTOR
BOTTOM VIEW
Note: in the 6 GHz ODU this connector is not used (a cover is present).

3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.3 1+0 FRAME INSTALLATION
This informations are valid for AP and AP/CC ODUs
To install the 1+0 frame fix it to the pole by using the two bracket and relevant nuts and lock nuts as shown in Fig. 3.15. Remove the protection cover shown in Fig. 3.16, and insert the O-rings. Install the ODU on the support frame as shown in Fig. 3.17 and tighten the four fixing screws. Fig. 3.19 shows the ODU installed on the frame in 1+0 configuration.
3.2.3.1
Tab. 3.5
1+0 Frame - P/N and flanges

1+0 frame - P/N and flanges RF FREQUENCY BAND (GHz) 6L-6U 7 8 10 11 13 1+0 FRAME P/N 534-114/06 534-114/07 534-114/07 534-114/10 534-114/11 534-114/13 TYPE OF FLANGE (to Antenna) UDR 70 UDR 84 UDR 84 UDR 100 UDR 100 UDR 120

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.15 1+0 frame - Pole fixing
POLE 115 mm
1+0 FRAME

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.16 1+0 frame - O-Rings
COVER
O-RING
O-RINGS
COVER
(*) - THE O-RINGS ARE DELIVERED WITH THE FRAME

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.17 1+0 frame - ODU installation
FIXING SCREWS
ODU

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.18 1+0 frame - installed ODU

3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.4 1+1 frame installation
This informations are valid for AP and AP/CC ODUs To install the 1+1 frame fix it to the pole by using the two bracket and relevant nuts and lock nuts as shown in Fig. 3.19. Remove the protection cover shown in Fig. 3.20, and insert the O-rings. Install the ODU on the support frame as shown in Fig. 3.21 and tighten the four fixing screws. Fig. 3.22 shows the ODU installed on the frame in 1+1 configuration.
3.2.4.1
Tab. 3.6
1+1 Frame - Attenuation, type of flange and P/N

1+1 frame - Attenuation, type of flange and P/N 1+1 Frame HSBY Balanced Coupling Attenuation (dB) 3 + 0.3 3 + 0.3 3 + 0.3 3 + 0.3 3 + 0.3 3 + 0.3 1+1 Frame HSBY Unbalanced Coupling Attenuation (dB) MAIN 534-112/06 534-112/07 534-112/07 534-112/10 534-112/11 534-112/13 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 ST.BY 10 + 1.5 10 + 1.5 10 + 1.5 10 + 1.5 10 + 1.5 10 + 1.5 UDR 70 UDR 84 UDR 84 UDR 100 UDR 100 UDR 120 Type of flange (to Antenna)
Frequency band RF (GHz)
P/N
P/N
6L/6U 7 8 10 11 13
534-113/06 534-113/07 534-113/07 534-113/10 534-113/11 534-113/13
Frequency band RF (GHz) 6L/6U 7 8 11 13
1+1 Frame Frequency Diversity (Co-polar) P/N 534-115/06 534-115/07 534-115/07 Coupling Attenuation (dB) 0.1 0.1 0.1 -
1+1 Frame Frequency Diversity (Cross-polar) P/N 534-116/06 534-116/07 534-116/07 534-116/11 534-116/13 Coupling Attenuation (dB) 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
Type of flange (to Antenna)
UDR 70 UDR 84 UDR 84 UDR 100 UDR 120

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.19 1+1 frame - Pole fixing
POLE 115 mm
1+1 FRAME

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.20 1+1 frame - O-Rings
COVER O-RING
O-RINGS
COVER
COVER
(*) - THE O-RINGS ARE DELIVERED WITH THE FRAME

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.21 1+1 frame - ODU installation
FIXING SCREWS ODU

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.22 1+1 frame - installed ODUs

3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.5 Solar shield
The ODU is protected with a solar shield fixed through 4 screws. Install the shield on the equipment and tighten the 4 screws as shown in Fig. 3.23. Fig. 3.23 Solar shield installation
ODU
SOLAR SHIELD
SCREW

3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.6
3.2.6.1
Not integrated system (solution with flexible waveguide)

1+0 system
Fig. 3.24
Connections (1+0 System)

1 - Antenna 2 - Pole diam 115 mm 3 - Antenna support 4 - ODU 5 - 1/4 coaxial cable (IF cable) 6 - Flexible waveguide 7 - ODU frame 8 - Flexible waveguide support P U = PRESSURIZABLE FLANGE = UNPRESSURIZABLE FLANGE
VERTICAL POLARIZATION
HORIZONTAL POLARIZATION

3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.6.2 1+1 HSBY system
Fig. 3.25
Connections (1+1 Hot Standby system)

1 - Antenna 2 - Pole diam 115 mm 3 - Antenna support 4 - ODU 5 - 1/4 coaxial cable (IF cable) 6 - Flexible waveguide 7 - ODU frame 8 - Flexible waveguide support

3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.6.3 2+0 system
Fig. 3.26
Connections (2+0 system)

1 - Antenna 2 - Pole diam 115 mm 3 - Antenna support 4 - ODU 5 - 1/4 coaxial cable (IF cable) 6 - Flexible waveguide 7 - ODU frame 8 - Flexible waveguide support

3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.6.4
Fig. 3.27
2x(1+1) FD system with dual polarization co-channel (with one antenna)

Connections (2x(1+1) FD CC system with one antenna)
1 - Antenna 2 - Pole diam 115 mm 3 - Antenna support 4 - ODU 5 - 1/4 coaxial cable (IF cable) 6 - Flexible waveguide 7 - ODU frame 8 - Flexible waveguide support 9 - RF LO synch. cables 10 - IF LO synch. cables
8 6
4 9
10

3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.6.5
Fig. 3.28
2x(1+1) FD system with dual polarization co-channel (with two antennas)

Connections (2x(1+1) FD CC system with two antennas)
2 1
6 8 7 10 6
4 9 4 3 1
6 8 7 10 6
4 5

3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.6.6
Fig. 3.29
2x(1+1) Hot Standby system with dual polarization co-channel

Connections (2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC system)
8 6
4 9
10

3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.7
3.2.7.1
Not integrated system (solution with elliptical waveguide)

1+0 system
Fig. 3.30

1 - Antenna 2 - Pole diam 115 mm 3 - Antenna support 4 - ODU 5 - 1/4 coaxial cable (IF cable) 6 - Elliptical waveguide 7 - ODU frame 8 - Elliptical waveguide support P U = PRESSURIZABLE FLANGE = UNPRESSURIZABLE FLANGE VERTICAL POLARIZATION
90 E BEND
TWIST
HORIZONTAL POLARIZATION
UNIVERSAL CLAMP AND RUBBER BUSY
PRESSURIZATION WINDOW
RIGHT SECTION

3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.7.2 1+1 system HSBY
Fig. 3.31
Connections (1+1 Hot Standby system)

1 - Antenna 2 - Pole diam 115 mm 3 - Antenna support 4 - ODU 5 - 1/4 coaxial cable (IF cable) 6 - Elliptical waveguide 7 - ODU frame

3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.7.3 2+0 system
Fig. 3.32

1 - Antenna 2 - Pole diam 115 mm 3 - Antenna support 4 - ODU 5 - 1/4 coaxial cable (IF cable) 6 - Elliptical waveguide 7 - ODU frame

3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.7.4
Fig. 3.33
2x(1+1) FD system with dual polarization co-channel (with one antenna)

Connections (2x(1+1) FD CC system with one antenna)
1 - Antenna 2 - Pole diam 115 mm 3 - Antenna support 4 - ODU 5 - 1/4 coaxial cable (IF cable) 6 - Elliptical waveguide 7 - ODU frame 8 - RF LO synch. cables 9 - IF LO synch. cables
2 1 3
5 7
4 4 8 9 5 7
8 6

3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.7.5
Fig. 3.34
2x(1+1) FD system with dual polarization co-channel (with two antennas)

Connections (2x(1+1) FD CC system with two antennas)
2 1 3
5 7 9
4 4 8
5 7 9

3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.7.6
Fig. 3.35
2x(1+1) Hot Standby system with dual polarization co-channel

Connections (2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC system)
2 1 3
5 7
4 4 8 9 5 7
8 6

3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.7.7 Static desiccator for small system
Fig. 3.36
Static desiccator for small system
WAVEGUIDE CONNECTOR
ODU SIDE
STATIC DESICCATOR
IT IS RECOMMENDED FOR SMALL AND SHORT WAVEGUIDE RUN UP TO: 5 m (7 GHz) AND 6 m (8 GHz) * = TYPICAL SERVICE LIFE IS ONE YEAR.
3.2.7.8
Pressurization with external dehydrator
Fig. 3.37
Pressurization with external dehydrator
WAVEGUIDE CONNECTOR
ODU SIDE
EXTERNAL DEHYDRATOR
DEHYDRATOR PIPE 136-510/11 IT IS RECOMMENDED FOR WAVEGUIDE RUN OVER: 5 m (7 GHz) AND 6 m (8 GHz)
Before inserting the static desiccator, it it recommended to clear the waveguide using nitrogen or dry air with a double quantity respect to the volume of the installed waveguide.

3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.7.9 P/N and composition
ODU 6 GHz Tab. 3.7 Elliptical waveguide (31263-XXX): composition ITEM 1a 1b 2 3a 3b Description Elliptical waveguide (6L) Elliptical waveguide (6U) Adapter for angular (10 pcs) Waveguide clamp (10 pcs) Waveguide clamp (10 pcs) P/N Q.ty
Tab. 3.8
Connectors and accessories (31263-778SR): composition ITEM a1 a2 b d e f1 f2 A B C E Description Waveguide connector (6L)(PDR 70) Waveguide connector (6U) (PDR 70) Pressurization window (UDR-UDR 70) Waveguide support Universal clamp (diam. 62) Rubber bush (diam. 62) Rubber bush (diam. 62) 90 P.E. bend (UDR-UDR 70) Right section (PDR-PDR 70) Twist (UDR-PDR 70) Adapter (UDR70-UDR70) P/N Q.ty

3 - INSTALLATION

ODU 7 GHz Tab. 3.9 Elliptical waveguide (31263-750): composition ITEM 1a 1b 2 3a 3b Description Elliptical waveguide (EWP 64-71) Elliptical waveguide (EWP 77-71W) Adapter for angular (10 pcs) Waveguide clamp (10 pcs) Waveguide clamp (10 pcs) P/N 127-042/05 127-042/14 165-005/84 165-005/69 165-005/70 Q.ty note 1-3 note 1-4 note 1 note 1-3 note 1-4
Tab. 3.10
Connectors and accessories (31263-778SR): composition ITEM a1 a2 b d e f1 f2 A B C E Description Waveguide connector EWP 64-71 (PDR 84) Waveguide connector EWP 77-71W (PDR 84) Pressurization window (UDR-UDR 84) Waveguide support Universal clamp (diam. 62) Rubber bush (diam. 62) Rubber bush (diam. 62) 90 P.E. bend (UDR-UDR 84) Right section (PDR-PDR 84) Twist (UDR-PDR 84) Adapter (UDR70-UDR84) P/N 504-237/99 504-237/87 308-005/16 332-055/21 165-005/19 332-202/90 332-202/87 504-393/36 504-816/27 504-631/21 504-216/21 Q.ty 2 note 3 2 note 4 1 3 3 3 note 3 3 note 4 1 note 5 1 1 note 2 1 note 6
Note 1 - Quantity to be defined as per plant requirements. Note 2 - Optional, use for horizontal polarization only. Note 3 - For channelling 7.1-7.4 GHz (shifter 161 MHz) and 7.4-7.7 GHz (shifter 154, 161, 168 MHz). Note 4 - For channelling 7.4-7.9 GHz (shifter 245 MHz). Note 5 - Do not supply with antennas 1.8 m. Note 6 - Supply with antennas 1.8 m.

3 - INSTALLATION

ODU 8 GHz Tab. 3.11 Elliptical waveguide (31263-758): composition ITEM 1 2 3 Description Elliptical waveguide (EWP 77-77) Adapter for angular (10 pcs) Waveguide clamp (10 pcs) P/N 127-042/06 165-005/84 165-005/70 Q.ty note 1 note 1 note 1
Tab. 3.12
Connectors and accessories (31263-779SR): composition ITEM a b d e f A B C Description Waveguide connector (PDR 84) Pressurization window (UDR-UDR 84) Waveguide support Universal clamp (diam. 62) Rubber bush (diam. 62) 90 P.E. bend (UDR-UDR 84) Right section (PDR-PDR 84) Twist (UDR-PDR 84) P/N 504-237/87 308-005/16 332-055/21 165-005/19 332-202/87 504-393/36 504-816/27 504-631/21 Q.ty 2 1 3 3 3 1 1 1 note 2
Note 1 - Quantity to be defined as per plant requirements. Note 2 - Optional, use for horizontal polarization only.

3 - INSTALLATION

ODU 10 GHz Tab. 3.13 Elliptical waveguide (31263-YYY): composition ITEM 1 2 3 Description Elliptical waveguide Adapter for angular (10 pcs) Waveguide clamp (10 pcs) P/N 165-005/84 165-005/71 Q.ty note 1 note 1 note 1
Tab. 3.14
Connectors and accessories (31263-YYYSR): composition ITEM a b d e f A B C Description Waveguide connector (PDR 100) Pressurization window (UDR-UDR 100) Waveguide support Universal clamp (diam. 38) Rubber bush (diam. 38) 90 P.E. bend (UDR-UDR 100) Right section (PDR-PDR 100) Twist (UDR-PDR 100) P/N 308-005/34 332-055/21 165-005/17 332-202/81 504-418/52 504-816/33 504-657/01 Q.ty 2 1 3 3 3 1 (note 5) 1 1 (note 2)
Note 1 - Quantity to be defined as per plant requirements. Note 2 - Optional, use for horizontal polarization only. Note 3 - Do not supply with antennas 1.8 m.

3 - INSTALLATION

ODU 11 GHz Tab. 3.15 Elliptical waveguide (31263-762): composition ITEM 1 2 3 Description Elliptical waveguide (EWP 90-107) Adapter for angular (10 pcs) Waveguide clamp (10 pcs) P/N 127-042/07 165-005/84 165-005/71 Q.ty note 1 note 1 note 1
Tab. 3.16
Connectors and accessories (31263-796SR): composition ITEM a b d e f A B C Description Waveguide connector (PDR 100) Pressurization window (UDR-UDR 100) Waveguide support Universal clamp (diam. 38) Rubber bush (diam. 38) 90 P.E. bend (UDR-UDR 100) Right section (PDR-PDR 100) Twist (UDR-PDR 100) P/N 504-237/88 308-005/34 332-055/21 165-005/17 332-202/81 504-418/52 504-816/33 504-657/01 Q.ty 2 1 3 3 3 1 (note 5) 1 1 (note 2)

3 - INSTALLATION

ODU 13 GHz Tab. 3.17 Elliptical waveguide (31263-766): composition ITEM 1 2 3 Description Elliptical waveguide (EWP 127) Adapter for angular (10 pcs) Waveguide clamp (10 pcs) P/N 127-042/08 165-005/84 165-005/72 Q.ty note 1 note 1 note 1
Tab. 3.18
Connectors and accessories (31263-796SR): composition ITEM f h i l n p q r Description Waveguide connector (PDR 120) Pressurization window (UDR-UDR 120) Waveguide support Universal clamp (diam. 38) Rubber bush (diam. 38) 90 P.E. bend (UDR-UDR 120) Right section (PDR-PDR 120) Twist (UDR-PDR 120) P/N 504-237/89 308-005/35 332-055/21 165-005/17 332-202/83 504-418/53 504-816/34 504-657/11 Q.ty 2 1 3 3 3 1 (note 5) 1 1 (note 2)

3 - INSTALLATION
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 3.3 INTERNAL CONNECTIONS ( for SRA4 IDU only)
The internal connections are based on the equipment configuration and on the type of channelling implemented. 1. 2. 3. 4. 2+0 CC configured equipment (par. 3.3.1): The internal connections must be made between the two ODU's and on the IDU. 2x(1+1) FD CC configured equipment (par. 3.3.2 and par. 3.3.3) 2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC configured equipment (par. 3.3.4) N+1 configured equipment (par. 3.3.5): The internal connections must be made between the two IDU's.
3.3.1
2+0 CC Configuration
To set up the CC configuration coaxial cable connections must be implemented on the IDU assembly and on the ODU assemblies (see Fig. 3.38 and Fig. 3.39).
Fig. 3.38
IDU assembly with CC configuration connections

CONNECTIONS for CC CONFIGURATION (Note)
U n. F A N
U V11 S E R
WST G703 In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
IF
PS IF
CHACHB
U V11 S E R
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
PS
Note: These cables are included in the P/N 702-300/12.

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.39 ODU AP/CC assemblies with CC configuration connections
IF LO coaxial cable Antenna side Antenna side
Antenna side
RF LO coaxial cable Antenna side

3 - INSTALLATION

3.3.2 2x(1+1) FD CC configuration (with one antenna)
To set up the CC configuration coaxial cable connections must be implemented on the IDU assembly and on the ODU assemblies (see Fig. 3.40, Fig. 3.41 and Fig. 3.42). Fig. 3.40 IDU assembly with CC configuration connections
CONNECTIONS for CC CONFIGURATION (Note) IDU 1+1 (V-pol.)
U n. F A N
U V11 S E R
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
CABLE ALM Exp. Port
In Out
CO-CH ODU PWR I O
IF
CH. 1
PS
CHA CHB
U V11 S E R
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
V-pol.
IF
CH. 2
PS
U n. F A N
U V11 S E R
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
CABLE ALM Exp. Port
In Out
CO-CH ODU PWR I O
IF
CH. 1
PS IF
CHA CHB
U V11 S E R
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
H-pol. CH. 2
PS
IDU 1+1 (H-pol.)
E-link
Note: Cables P/N 314-107/97 L=150mm, these cables are included in the P/N 702-300/12.

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.41 IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna)
RF HYBR. H Pol. SIDE
IF LO coaxial cable (Note) RF HYBR. V Pol. SIDE RF HYBR. H Pol. SIDE

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.42 RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna)
RF LO coaxial cable RF HYBR. H Pol. SIDE
RF LO coaxial cable RF HYBR. V Pol. SIDE RF HYBR. H Pol. SIDE

3 - INSTALLATION

3.3.3 2x(1+1) FD CC configuration (with two antennas)
CONNECTIONS for CC CONFIGURATION (Note) 1+1 IDU ( V-H) pol.
U n. F A N
U V11 S E R
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
CABLE ALM Exp. Port
In Out
CO-CH ODU PWR I O
IF
CH. 1 V-POL CH. 2 H-POL.
PS IF
CHA CHB
U V11 S E R
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
PS
U n. F A N
U V11 S E R
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
CABLE ALM Exp. Port
In Out
CO-CH ODU PWR I O
IF
CH. 1 H-POL. CH.2 V-POL.
PS IF
CHA CHB
U V11 S E R
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
PS
1+1 IDU (H-V) pol.
E-link

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.44 IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas)
RF C.P. Filter V Pol. SIDE
IF LO coaxial cable (Note) RF C.P. Filter H Pol. SIDE
RF C.P. Filter H Pol. SIDE
IF LO coaxial cable (Note) RF C.P. Filter V Pol. SIDE
AP/CC ODU 2 TOP SIDE VIEW 2 nd (1+1) ODU system

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.45 RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas)
RF LO coaxial cable RF C.P. Filter V Pol. SIDE RF C.P. Filter H Pol. SIDE
RF LO coaxial cable RF C.P. Filter H Pol. SIDE RF C.P. Filter V Pol. SIDE

3 - INSTALLATION

3.3.4 2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC configuration
CONNECTIONS for CC CONFIGURATION (Note) IDU 1+1 (V-pol.)
U n. F A N
U V11 S E R
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
CABLE ALM Exp. Port
In Out
CO-CH ODU PWR I O
IF
MAIN
PS IF
CHA CHB
U V11 S E R
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
V-pol. STBY
PS
U n. F A N
U V11 S E R
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
CABLE ALM Exp. Port
In Out
CO-CH ODU PWR I O
IF
MAIN
PS IF
CHA CHB
U V11 S E R
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
H-pol. STBY
PS
IDU 1+1 (H-pol.)
E-link

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.47 IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) Hot Standby))
RF COUPLER H Pol. SIDE
IF LO coaxial cable (Note) RF COUPLER V Pol. SIDE RF COUPLER H Pol. SIDE

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.48 RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs ( 2x(1+1) FD with one antenna)
RF LO coaxial cable RF COUPLER H Pol. SIDE
AP/CC ODU 4 BOTTOM SIDE VIEW 2nd (1+1) HSBY ODU system

3 - INSTALLATION

3.3.5 N+1 Configuration
The connections between the IDU assemblies shown in Fig. 3.49 must be made in order to set up the supervisory link (E-link) and the protection link (B-link). Fig. 3.49 Connection between the IDU assemblies (B-link and E-link)
U n. F A N
IDU MAIN
Q-lan E-Link LCT
U V11 S E R
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
IF
STBY
PS IF
CHACHB
U V11 S E R
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
CH. 1
PS
IDU EXT
Q-lan E-Link
U n. F A N
U V11 S E R
WST G703 In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
IF
CH. 2
PS IF
CHACHB
U V11 S E R
LCT
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
PS
CH. 3
E-link (Note)
B-link (Note)
Note: These cables are (P/N 597-525/57).
included in
the
N+1
base connection elements

3 - INSTALLATION
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 3.4 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS
All the connectors used for the external connections are easily accessible from the front side of the indoor assembly. All the cables from/to the outside are brought down from the cabinet top inside the side wall slots or, in the case the wiring is running under the raised floor, they are made to ascend likewise.
3.4.1
3.4.1.1
SRA4 IDU
Primary supply voltage connection
The outdoor assembly (ODU) is remotely power supplied by the indoor assembly (P/N 702-300/12) by means of an IF coaxial connection cable (2 in the 1+1 configuration). The indoor assembly BB units are fed by DC/DC converters, which transform the delivered -48 V voltage. The primary supply voltage, delivered by 48 V battery, has to be applied to the 2-poles male connector MAIN POWER INPUT. See Fig. 3.50.
Fig. 3.50
Primary Power Supply Connections
CHA CHB Alarm IDU PWR I O

U S E R
ODU ALM 2MBit/s In Out STM-1 #1 In Out STM-1 #2 In Out ODU ALM 2MBit/s In Out STM-1 #1 In Out STM-1 #2 In Out
CABLE ALM Exp. Port
CO-CH In Out
ODU PWR O I
IF
Key
V11
G703
CO-CH In Out I ODU PWR O
PS IF
CHA CHB Q-lan E--link LCT

U S E R
CABLE ALM Exp. Port
V11
G703
PS
Main power input A2 A1
Soldering side view Pin No A1 A2 Signal -VBAT +VBAT

3 - INSTALLATION

3.4.1.2 Connector functions
Fig. 3.52 to Fig. 3.56 and Tab. 3.19 to Tab. 3.25, show the positions and functions of the connectors P/N 598-645/45.
In the N+1 configuration the connectors with a cross in Fig. 3.51 are not used.
Fig. 3.51
Connectors not used in the N+1 configuration
U n. F A N
IDU MAIN
Q-lan E-Link LCT
U V11 S E R
WST G703 In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
IF
STBY
PS IF
CHACHB
U V11 S E R
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
CH. 1
PS
U n. F A N
IDU EXT
Q-lan E-Link
U V11 S E R
WST G703 In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
IF
CH. 2
PS IF
CHACHB
U V11 S E R
LCT
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
PS
CH. 3
E-link
B-link

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.52 155 Mbit/s Tributary Coaxial Connections Electrical interface
U S E R
CABLE ALM Exp. Port
CO-CH In Out
ODU PWR O I
IF
Key
V11
G703
CO-CH In Out ODU PWR O I
PS IF
CHA CHB Q-lan E- link LCT

U S E R
CABLE ALM Exp. Port
V11
G703
PS
STM 1 #1 IN OUT IN
STM 1 #2 OUT
Optical interface
CHA CHB Alarm Key IDU PWR O
U n. F A N
U S E R
V11
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
CABLE ALM Exp. Port
CO-CH In
ODU PWR I O
IF
PS IF
CHA CHB
U S E R
Q-lan
E- link
LCT
V11
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
CABLE ALM Exp. Port
PS
STM 1 #1
STM 1 #2
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
Tab. 3.19
155 Mbit/s Electrical Tributary Coaxial Connections Coax. IN OUT Signal 155 Mbit/s Tributary Input 75 Ohm (G.703) 155 Mbit/s Tributary Output 75 Ohm (G.703)
Tab. 3.20
STM-1 Optical Tributary Connections SC IN OUT Optical Tributary Input Optical Tributary Output Signal

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.53 WST 2 Mbit/s Coaxial Connections
U S E R
CABLE ALM Exp. Port
CO-CH In Out
ODU PWR O I
IF
Key
V11
G703
PS IF

U S E R
CABLE ALM Exp. Port
V11
G703
PS
WS IN
OUT
Tab. 3.21
WST 2 Mbit/s Coaxial Connections Connect. Position IN OUT Description 2048 Mbit/s/75 Ohm (G.703) WS Input 2048 Mbit/s/75 Ohm (G.703) WS Output
Fig. 3.54
Alarm Connector
CHA CHB ODU ALM 2MBit/s In Out STM-1 #1 In Out STM-1 #2 In Out ODU ALM 2MBit/s In Out STM-1 #1 In Out STM-1 #2 In Out CABLE ALM Exp. Port CO-CH In Out ODU PWR O I IF
Alarm
Key
IDU PWR I O
U S E R
V11
G703
PS IF

U S E R
CABLE ALM Exp. Port
V11
G703
PS
13
25 ALARMS 14

3 - INSTALLATION

Tab. 3.22 Alarms Connector (IDU assembly) Pin 1 2 3 8 9 4 10 5 11 6 12 7 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Signal ALIM OFF CRITICAL MINOR MAJOR TEST CEN-OUT1 CEN-OUT2 CEN-OUT3 CEN-OUT4 CEN-IN1 CEN-IN2 CEN-IN3 CEN-IN4 RESTFAULT RESTFAULTN Description No secondary power supply on both BB-Modem units Critical alarm Minor alarm Major alarm Test/Warning alarm Station command output #1 Station command output #2 Station command output #3 Station command output #4 Station alarm input #1 Station alarm input #2 Station alarm input #3 Station alarm input #4 Interface type B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B -
Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used
Interface B = electronic contact
normal condition = open (-3 ... +2 Vdc; > 60 kohm) alarm condition = ground (-3 ... +2 Vdc; < 200 ohm)
INPUT STATION ALARMS: the input does not sink current as long as the input voltage is less than 5 V the circuit will not be damaged as long as the input voltage is between -70 V and 75 V. OUTPUTS ALARMS: the external equipment (sensing the output alarms) can be positive voltage or negative voltage: open resistance > 500 Mohm ground resistance < 1 ohm max. switching voltage: 110 Vdc max. switching current: 0.5 A max. switching power (resistive load): 15 W Note: Refer also to par. 2.2 "TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS" for the electrical interface of the alarms.

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.55 LCT (RS 232) Connector
U S E R
CABLE ALM Exp. Port
CO-CH In Out
ODU PWR O I
IF
Key
V11
G703
PS IF

U S E R
CABLE ALM Exp. Port
V11
G703
PS
LCT
6 1
9 5
Tab. 3.23
LCT (RS 232) Connector PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signal F_CD F_RXD F_TXD F_DTR GND F_DSR F_RTS F_CTS n.c. I O I/O I I O O Description Received Line Signal Detector (Data Carrier Detect) Received Data Transmit Data Data Terminal Ready Signal Ground Data Set Ready Request To Send Clear To Send Ring Indicator

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.56 64 kbit/s service channel connector

U S E R
CABLE ALM Exp. Port
CO-CH In Out
ODU PWR O I
IF
Key
V11
G703
CO-CH In Out I ODU PWR O
PS IF

U S E R
CABLE ALM Exp. Port
V11
G703
PS
Tab. 3.24
V.11 channel connector PIN 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Signal CKB CKA DB DA CKB CKA DB DAa I/O O O O O O O I I Description Clock B - codirectional output Clock A - codirectional output Data B - codirectional output Data A - codirectional output Clock B - contradirectional output Clock A - contradirectional output Data B - contradirectional input Data A - contradirectional input
In case theExternal EOWshould be used, use the V11 connector as follows: - 1+0/1+1 configuration: use the V11 connector of the upper BB-MODEM unit - N+1 configuration: use the V11 connector of the lower BB-MODEM unit of the MAIN IDU - 2+0 configuration: use the V11 connector of the two BB-MODEM units. Tab. 3.25 G.703 channel connector PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal OUT OUT + IN + IN I/O O O I I Output Output + Input + Input Description

3 - INSTALLATION

3.4.1.3 Base connection elements
In the following paragraph is given the information on the cables to be used during the installation.
3.4.1.3.1 Connection elements for 1+0 system (P/N 597-525/21)

Refer to Tab. 3.26. Tab. 3.26 Connection elements for 1+0 system (P/N 597-525/21) Ref. Fig. 3.57 6 14 15 16 26 30 32 33 34 61 62 63 65 80 82 P/N 332-308/64 422-030/83 422-062/61 422-053/63 421-015/70 314-302/70 206-701/06D 207-505/09D 207-501/09D 206-710/21 205-534/11D 211-516/01 332-309/76 314-327/91 332-011/35 Power supply kit Metal shell Sub-D conn 25P Modular plug 8P shielded 1.0/2.3 coaxial plug Earth cable Hexagonal thin nuts M4 Plain washer SST 4 PIC Spring washer Inox 4 Cage nut M6 Screw 6x16 Bush 6x3.5 Mounting kit (N-OSM) coaxial cable IDU/ODU cable clampe kit Description Q.ty 1 1 1 4 6 1 1 1 1 4 4 4 1 1 1

3 - INSTALLATION

3.4.1.3.2 Connection elements for 1+1/2+0 system (P/N 597-525/22)
Refer to Tab. 3.27. Tab. 3.27 Connection elements for 1+1/2+0 system (P/N 597-525/22) Ref. Fig. 3.58 6 14 15 16 26 30 32 33 34 61 62 63 65 80 82 P/N 332-308/64 422-030/83 422-062/61 422-053/63 421-015/70 314-302/70 206-701/06D 207-505/09D 207-501/09D 206-710/21 205-534/11D 211-516/01 332-309/76 314-327/91 332-011/35 Power supply kit Metal shell Sub-D conn 25P Modular plug 8P shielded 1.0/2.3 coaxial plug Earth cable Hexagonal thin nuts M4 Plain washer SST 4 PIC Spring washer Inox 4 Cage nut M6 Screw 6x16 Bush 6x3.5 Mounting kit (N-OSM) coaxial cable IDU/ODU cable clampe kit Description Q.ty 2 1 1 6 12 1 1 1 1 4 4 4 1 2 1
3.4.1.3.3 Connection elements for upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 (P/N 597-525/33)
Refer to Tab. 3.28. Tab. 3.28 Connection elements for upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 (P/N 597-525/33) Ref. Fig. 3.59 6 16 26 80 P/N 332-308/64 422-053/63 421-015/70 314-327/91 Power supply kit Modular plug 8P shielded 1.0/2.3 coaxial plug (N-OSM) coaxial cable Description Q.ty 1 2 6 1

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.57 Connection kit for 1+0 system
26 15 16 14 Alarms interface 2 Mbit/s out 2 Mbit/s in STM-1 in 1 STM-1 out 1
26* 80 26*
IDU-ODU cable
64 kbit/s G703 interface 64 kbit/s V11 interface
STM-1 in 2 STM-1 out 2
6 E-Link interface Q interface 16 To connect to the rack ground 30 32 33 34 PWR 1
65 63 61 62
* = Only for electrical STM-1 traffic

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.58 Connection kit for 1+1/2+0 system
26 15 16 14 Alarms interface 2 Mbit/s out 2 Mbit/s in STM-1 in 1 STM-1 out 1
26* 80 26*
IDU-ODU cable
64 kbit/s G703 interface 64 kbit/s V11 interface
STM-1 in 2 STM-1 out 2
Q interface E-Link interface 16 64 kbit/s V11 interface 64 kbit/s G703 interface 16 2 Mbit/s in 2 Mbit/s out 26 STM-1 out 2 STM-1 in 2 STM-1 out 1 STM-1 in 1
PWR 1 6
26* 32 26* 33 30 34
To connect to the rack ground
65 63 61 62

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.59 Connection kit for 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 upgrading
80
IDU-ODU cable
PWR 1 64 kbit/s V11 interface 64 kbit/s G703 interface 16 2 Mbit/s in 2 Mbit/s out 26* STM-1 out 2 STM-1 in 2 STM-1 out 1 STM-1 in 1 26* 26* 6

3 - INSTALLATION

3.4.2
3.4.2.1
SRA4 IDU-STM1
Primary supply voltage connection
The outdoor assembly (Transceiver) is remotely power supplied by the indoor assembly (P/N 702-300/12) by means of an IF coaxial connection cable (2 in the 1+1 configuration). The indoor assembly BB units are fed by DC/DC converters, which transform the delivered -48 V voltage. The primary supply voltage, delivered by 48 V battery, has to be applied to the 2-poles male connector MAIN POWER INPUT. See Fig. 3.50.
Fig. 3.60
Primary Power Supply Connections in IDU assembly
Main power input A2 A1
Soldering side view Pin No A1 A2 Signal -VBAT +VBAT

3 - INSTALLATION

3.4.2.2 Connector functions
Fig. 3.61 to Fig. 3.64 and Tab. 3.29 to Tab. 3.34, show the positions and functions of the connectors P/N 598-645/45. Fig. 3.61 155 Mbit/s Tributary Connections Electrical interface
STM 1 IN OUT
Optical interface
STM 1
OUT
IN
Tab. 3.29
155 Mbit/s Electrical Tributary Coaxial Connections Coax. IN OUT Signal 155 Mbit/s Tributary Input 75 Ohm (G.703) 155 Mbit/s Tributary Output 75 Ohm (G.703)
Tab. 3.30
STM-1 Optical Tributary Connections SC IN OUT Optical Tributary Input Optical Tributary Output Signal

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.62 Alarm Connector (IDU assembly)
13 25
1 14
ALARMS
Tab. 3.31
Alarms Connector (IDU assembly) Pin 1 2 3 8 9 4 10 5 11 6 12 7 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Signal ALIM OFF CRITICAL MINOR MAJOR TEST CEN-OUT1 CEN-OUT2 CEN-OUT3 CEN-OUT4 CEN-IN1 CEN-IN2 CEN-IN3 CEN-IN4 RESTFAULT RESTFAULTN Description No secondary power supply on both BB-Modem units Critical alarm Minor alarm Major alarm Test/Warning alarm Station command output #1 Station command output #2 Station command output #3 Station command output #4 Station alarm input #1 Station alarm input #2 Station alarm input #3 Station alarm input #4 Interface type B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B -
Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used
Interface B = electronic contact
normal condition = open (-3 ... +2 Vdc; > 60 kohm) alarm condition = ground (-3 ... +2 Vdc; < 200 ohm)

3 - INSTALLATION

INPUT STATION ALARMS: the input does not sink current as long as the input voltage is less than 5 V the circuit will not be damaged as long as the input voltage is between -70 V and 75 V. OUTPUTS ALARMS: the external equipment (sensing the output alarms) can be positive voltage or negative voltage: open resistance > 500 Mohm ground resistance < 1 ohm max. switching voltage: 110 Vdc max. switching current: 0.5 A max. switching power (resistive load): 15 W Note: Refer also to par. 2.2 "TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS" for the electrical interface of the alarms.

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.63 LCT (RS 232) Connector (IDU shelf)
6 1
LCT
9 5
Tab. 3.32
LCT (RS 232) Connector PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signal F_CD F_RXD F_TXD F_DTR GND F_DSR F_RTS F_CTS n.c. I O I/O I I O O Description Received Line Signal Detector (Data Carrier Detect) Received Data Transmit Data Data Terminal Ready Signal Ground Data Set Ready Request To Send Clear To Send Ring Indicator

3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.64 64 kbit/s service channel connector
Tab. 3.33
V.11 channel connector PIN 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Signal CKB CKA DB DA CKB CKA DB DAa I/O O O O O O O I I Description Clock B - codirectional output Clock A - codirectional output Data B - codirectional output Data A - codirectional output Clock B - contradirectional output Clock A - contradirectional output Data B - contradirectional input Data A - contradirectional input
In case theExternal EOWshould be used, use the V11 connector as follows: - 1+0/1+1 configuration: use the V11 connector of the upper BB-MODEM unit - 2+0 configuration: use the V11 connector of the two BB-MODEM units. Tab. 3.34 G.703 channel connector PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal OUT OUT + IN + IN I/O O O I I Output Output + Input + Input Description

3 - INSTALLATION

3.4.2.3 External connection elements
In the following paragraph is given the information on the cables to be used during the installation.

Refer to Tab. 3.35. Tab. 3.35 Connection elements for 1+0 system (P/N 597-526/77) P/N 6 14 15 16 26 30 32 33 34 61 62 63 65 80 82 332-308/64 422-030/83 422-062/61 422-053/63 421-015/70 314-302/70 206-701/06D 207-505/09D 207-501/09D 206-710/21 205-534/11D 211-516/01 332-309/76 314-327/91 332-011/35 Power supply kit Metal shell Sub-D conn 25P Modular plug 8P shielded 1.0/2.3 coaxial plug Earth cable Hexagonal thin nuts M4 Plain washer SST 4 PIC Spring washer Inox 4 Cage nut M6 Screw 6x16 Bush 6x3.5 Mounting kit (N-OSM) coaxial cable IDU/ODU cable clampe kit Description Q.ty 1 1 1 4 2 1 1 1 1 4 4 4 1 1 1

3 - INSTALLATION

Refer to Tab. 3.36. Tab. 3.36 Connection elements for 1+0 system (P/N 597-526/78) P/N 6 14 15 16 26 30 32 33 34 61 62 63 65 80 82 332-308/64 422-030/83 422-062/61 422-053/63 421-015/70 314-302/70 206-701/06D 207-505/09D 207-501/09D 206-710/21 205-534/11D 211-516/01 332-309/76 314-327/91 332-011/35 Power supply kit Metal shell Sub-D conn 25P Modular plug 8P shielded 1.0/2.3 coaxial plug Earth cable Hexagonal thin nuts M4 Plain washer SST 4 PIC Spring washer Inox 4 Cage nut M6 Screw 6x16 Bush 6x3.5 Mounting kit (N-OSM) coaxial cable IDU/ODU cable clampe kit Description Q.ty 2 1 1 6 4 1 1 1 1 4 4 4 1 2 1

3 - INSTALLATION

3.4.3 ODU connections for received field measurement
The ODU has a BNC connector for the measurement of the received field (see Fig. 3.65). Fig. 3.65 Connector for the measurement of received field
TOP VIEW ODU AP
For factory use
BNC connector for Rx field measurement
For factory use
TOP VIEW ODU AP/CC For factory use
BNC connector for Rx field measurement For factory use

3 - INSTALLATION
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 3.5 IDU/ODU CONNECTION WITH BRAIDED OR 1/4 COAXIAL CABLE
3.5.1
Fig. 3.66
Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable - ODU side connection

Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable - ODU side connection
Coaxial connector 90 N type
(a)(b)
To IDU section Braided or 1/4 IN/OUT coaxial cable (a)(b)
To IDU section
(a) (b)
For P/N of Braided coaxial cable see PAR. 3.5.6. For P/N of 1/4 coaxial cable see PAR. 3.5.7.

3 - INSTALLATION

3.5.2
Fig. 3.67
Grounding connections
Grounding connections
Grounding kit (b) (a) Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable (a) (c)
(a) (b) Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable
Ground cable 1x16 mm2 (d) Grounding plate (d)(e) 333-309/91 (on request) Connect to Station Main Earting (d)
Grounding plate (f) 333-047/07 (on request)
Bending radius Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable (a) (b)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
To connect to the station grounding system For P/N of Braided coaxial cable see PAR. 3.5.6. while for P/N of 1/4 coaxial cable see PAR. 3.5.7. For the fixing of the Braided or 1/4 coaxial cables see Fig. 3.69. The standard delivery includes only one grounding kit to be installed before the entrance of the shelter/ equipment room. Additional grounding kits are provided on demand. This cable is provided with the electrical installation kit 597-525/05 For the fixing of the ground plate see Fig. 3.68. Optional item, if required must be separately provided.

3 - INSTALLATION

3.5.3
Fig. 3.68
Pole fixing of the grounding plate kit (P/N 332-309/91)

Pole fixing of the grounding plate kit (P/N 332-309/91)
(a)
Tie 223-002/86
Plate 332-004/92
(a)
Grouding plate 257-41/507
(a)
(b)
Hex nut (b) Spring washer (b) Plain washer
Screw
(b) (b)
Terminal tube 16 mm2 Grounding cable (c) 1x16 mm2 YE-GR
(a) (b) (c)
These materials are included in P/N 332-309/91. These materials are provided with installation kit 314-205/76 This cable is provided with electrical material 597-525/05

3 - INSTALLATION

3.5.4 Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable - Typical fixing
Fig. 3.69
Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable - Typical fixing
(b)
Universal cable clamp (332-202/95) (332-202/96) Cable tie (223-009/25) indoor
Cable tie (223-009/27)
(a)
(a)
Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable
CABLE TIE (a)
UNIVERSAL CABLE CLAMP (b) (c)
External back cable tie D = 74 to 140 mm 223-009/27 (a) D = 26 to 62 mm 223-009/25 (b)
for 2 Braided or 1/4 cables 332-202/65 (a) (b)
for 4 Braided or 1/4cables 332-202/66
N 10 external black tie, for the fixing of the cable running on the pole, are included in the installation kit (314-205/76). Material to be adopted according to the installation requirements, is not included in the installation materials, if required must be separately provided. Refer to PAR. 3.5.4.1 for the Braided cable recommended spacing and refer to PAR. 3.5.4.2 for the 1/4 cable recommended spacing.

3 - INSTALLATION

3.5.4.1 Recommended clamp spacing for Braided coaxial cable
Clamp spacing recommendation is based on the guidelines stated in EIA Standard RS-222 (Structural Standards for Steel Antenna Towers and Antenna Supporting Structures) and BSI CP3 (Code of Basic Data for the Design of Buildings, Wind Loading). Geographical location, as well as height of tower/must, to which the clamps are attached, may have a significant impact on installation conditions. Therefore, unless otherwise specified, the assumptions made to define the maximum clamp spacing are the following: Tower height 45m 1/2 radial ice Clamps properly installed and tightened
Based on the above conditions, the recommended MAXIMUM CLAMP SPACING for Braided COAXIAL CABLE type CNT 300FR (Andrew) and ICN48 (INTERCOND) is 0.5 m (wind load is 240 km/h)
3.5.4.2
Recommended clamp spacing for 1/4 coaxial cable

Clamp spacing recommendation is based on the guidelines stated in EIA Standard RS-222 (Structural Standards for Steel Antenna Towers and Antenna Supporting Structures) and BSI CP3 (Code of Basic Data for the Design of Buildings, Wind Loading). Geographical location, as well as height of tower/must, to which the clamps are attached, may have a significant impact on installation conditions. Therefore, unless otherwise specified, the assumptions made to define the maximum clamp spacing are the following: Tower height 45m 1/2lh radial ice Clamps properly installed and tightened
Based on the above conditions, the recommended MAXIMUM CLAMP SPACING for 1/4 COAXIAL CABLE type LDF1RN-50 (Andrew) and CF 1/4lr CuH (RFS) is: 0.8m (Wind Load 200 Km/h) or 0.5m (Wind Load 240 Km/h).

3 - INSTALLATION

3.5.5
Fig. 3.70
Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable - Connection on IDU side

IBraided or 1/4 coaxial cable - Connection on IDU side
TO GROUNDING BAR ETSI (19) RACK
(a)
Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable Coaxial N-plug
to odu section
(b)
OSM/N coaxial tail (L.=1 Mt.) (314-327/91)
(a)
(c)
Ground cable ye-gr 6 mm2 (314-304/51) Coaxial cable fixing bracket (232-124/20) OSM/N coaxial tail (L.=1 Mt.) (314-327/91)
(c)
(b)
to idu section
(a) (b (c)
For P/N of Braided coaxial cable see PAR. 3.5.6. while for P/N of 1/4 coaxial cable see PAR. 3.5.7. This material is included in the base connection elements (2+0 with ADM) 597-525/90. This material is included in the fixing accessories 332-011/35, included in the base connection element 597-525/90.

3 - INSTALLATION

3.5.6
Tab. 3.37 P/N 104-009/50 314-331/88 (b) 597-525/78A 597-525/78 (b)
Braided coaxial cable Andrew and Intercond sets

ANDREW set (a) Description Unit Mt. Nr. Q.ty (c) (d) 1 1 1
Braided CNT300 - 50 Ohm COAXIAL CABLE Braided COAX CABLE ACCESSORIES 421-025/38 421-008/35 333-031/21 COAX N-PLUG 90 COAX N-PLUG GROUNDING KIT
Tab. 3.38 P(N 104-009/51 314-331/88 (b) 597-525/78B 597-525/78 (b)
INTERCOND set (a) Description Unit Mt. Nr. Q.ty (c) (d) 1 1 1
CF 3/10l3 ICN48 - 50 Ohm COAXIAL CABLE Braided COAX CABLE ACCESSORIES 421-025/39 421-008/36 333-031/22 a) b) c) d) COAX N-PLUG 90 COAX N-PLUG GROUNDING KIT
= The ANDREW and INTERCOND material sets are alternative to each other = Commercial reference code = The max length of one IDU/ODU connection is 190 mt = Q.ty 1 for each IDU/ODU connection

3 - INSTALLATION

3.5.7
Tab. 3.39 P/N
1/4 coaxial cable Andrew set

Andrew set Description Unit Mt. Nr. Q.ty NOTE 1 1 1 1 1
104-009/42 1/4 LDF1RN - 50 ohm COAXIAL CABLE (314-327/79)(a) 597-523/94A 1/4 COAX CABLE ACCESSORIES (597-523/94(a)* 421-008/88 421-008/84 333-031/19 STRAIGHT N type COAX N-PLUG 90 N type COAX N-PLUG GROUNDING KIT
The above listed quantities are relevant to one IDU/ODU connection NOTE 1 = The max length of one IDU/ODU connection is 300 m NOTE 2 = N1 Grounding Kit is standard solution for a 1/4coaxial cable typical path 50m, the use of additional Grounding Kits has to be evaluated according to the path type. = COMMERCIAL REFERENCE CODE
a)

3 - INSTALLATION

LA
PA G E
4 - ACTIVATION
4 ACTIVATION
4.1 PRESETTINGS
In this paragraph instructions are given to check and, if required, to carry out the presettings relevant to the system type where the equipment is utilized. There are two presetting types: Hardware settings, performed through jumpers or connections Software settings, carried out through PC with dedicated software. With regard to the system software setting options refer to the Guide to the use of the control software", in the Operator Manual (OMN).
4.1.1
Hardware settings
In the equipment there are no hardware settings.
4.1.2
System E2PROM
The IDU contains two different system EEPROMs to store all the NE configurations: internal EEPROM in the Controller unit external EEPROM (KEY), inserted in the front panel of the Alarm Restitution unit.
In the key in the factory have been stored the Serial Number (S/N) and the licence type.
4.2 ACTIVATION
This paragraph includes the procedures for checkings that can be carried out during the installation while activating the equipment. Fig. 6.7 and Fig. 6.8 show the connectors and the control elements, located on the equipment front panel.

4 - ACTIVATION

4.2.1 Local checks
All the units comprising the equipment are tested and adjusted at the factory in order to optimize the characteristics: usually, checks on these unit are not required while installed. Therefore, the procedures here below described have to be utilized only in case of problems arising in the system, due to equipment malfunction. The checks are: make sure the equipment is correctly equipped as per indications in the par. 2.3 "EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION". check the connection cables (or cable) between the indoor assembly and the outdoor assemblies (or assembly) are connected and IF connection have been made as per indications in the par. 2.3 "EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION". check the equipment is connected to the primary supply voltage as described in the par. 2.3 "EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION".
4.2.2
IDU first installation

Insert the KEY into the right connector on the Alarms Restitution unit. Switch ON the IDU by turning the switch situated on the front cover of the Alarms Restitution unit. At this point the Controller reads the S/N and the type of license of the KEY and stores it internally. The LCT shall now be able to complete the equipment configuration. (Based on the type of license memorised a basic default configuration will be memorised on the KEY). When configuring the equipment through the LCT, the configuration will be automatically memorised both on the Controller unit and on the KEY.
The KEY must always be inserted during regular equipment configuration. Should it be removed, the "No setting mode" alarm will be activated (and the red "CRITICALMAJOR" LED will light up on the Controller unit) thereby not allowing to modify the equipment configuration through the LCT. If a KEY other than that used during the first installation is inserted while the equipment is ON, the Controller compares the S/N and the type of license memorised (and that corresponds to the first installation KEY) with that of the KEY inserted. A data misalignment is detected and the "No setting mode" alarm is activated which will prevent modifying the configuration through the LCT. Check by the LCT that the output power of the Modulator is +5 dBm.

4 - ACTIVATION

The following are the alarms associated to the KEY: Tab. 4.1 KEY alarms Alarm Key missing or key mismatch Description Physically missing or data memorised on the key differ from those memorised on the IDU Non recoverable data failure LCT alarm "No setting mode" alarm activated
Key Fault Fig. 4.1
"Key fault" alarm activated
IDU Key position (Alarm Restitution unit)
ALARM RESTITUTION Unit CONTROLLER Unit
BB/MODEM #1 Unit
BB/MODEM #2 Unit
ALARM Unita RESTITUTORE RESTITUTION ALLRMI unit

Alarms Key ON IDU PWR OF
FAN Unita unit FAN CONTROLLER Unita unit CONTROLLORE

Q-lan E-Link LCT
T E S T M N / W C / M J
KEY

4 - ACTIVATION

4.2.3 Alignment
It is necessary to execute the alignment of the antennas to ensure the correct operation of the equipment and to make reliable the radio link to the remote terminal. For the procedures of adjustment and aiming of the antennas, refer to the documentation annexed to the antennas themselves. To make easy the aiming operation, the ODU is equipped with a BNC connector that makes available the AGC voltage as function of the received field. Fig. 4.2 ODU (AP) connection for the measurement of the received field
Per uso interno
Connettore BNC per misura del campo Rx
Fig. 4.3
ODU (AP/CC) connection for the measurement of the received field
Per uso interno
Per uso interno Connettore BNC per misura del campo Rx
The VAGC range is between -3,4 V and 1,2 V (typical values) for PRX values between -30 dBm and -75 dBm, according to a linear law with rate of about 0,5 V for 10 dB.

4 - ACTIVATION

4.2.4
4.2.4.1
Checks on equipment
List of checks
Control of the system configuration Configuration of IP address PTx and PRx Switching test for 1+1 systems Background BER Final checks Restore of the operating conditions
4.2.4.2
Control of the system configuration

Control, by means of the supplied SW (LCT), that the system configuration is according to what required for the connection in object. In particular, it is necessary to set on both terminals the configuration (see Tab. 2.7 System Type in par. 2.1.2), the operating frequency and the ATPC enabling, according to what foreseen by the specifications related to the interested link. Eventually, configure the equipment according to what specified in Guide to use of the control software, in the Operator Manual (OMN).
4.2.4.3
Configuration of IP address
On the first installation, the IDU has a default IP address (192.168.255.3) and then the user can access the NE, set the network IP address and build the map containing the IP address itself. For this purpose, refer to the guide to use of the management program, of the OMN manual. If the network planning was not available, it is necessary to insert, in the two terminals, addresses belonging to two different IP subnetwork (site A = 100.100.100.6; site B = 150.150.150.6), Netmask 255.255.255.0, to be able to control both the Network Elements
4.2.4.4
Received and Transmitted Power

By means of Measurement --> Unit menu of the supplied SW (LCT), it is possible to check the levels of received and transmitted power (refer to the guide to use of the management program, of OMN manual).
4.2.4.5
Switching test
In presence of protected configurations (1+1 Frequency Diversity or 1+1 Hot Standby), proceed to the verification of the switching functionality. With the aid of a SDH frame analyzer, connected to the tributary access points, check that, after the different switching operations, the service stays active. For a correct execution of the switching operations, refer to the guide of use of the management program, in OMN manual.

4 - ACTIVATION

4.2.4.6 Background BER
Check that the connection is active and operating (no alarm, payload transit); for this purpose, a SDH frame analyzer can be connected to the tributary access points or, alternatively, it is possible to monitor the connection quality by means of the Performance Monitoring functionality provided by the software for equipment management (refer to the Operator Manual - OMN). In this way, check that the qualitative parameters of the connection are in compliance to the project specification.
4.2.4.7
Final checks
After all the local verifications and the alignment operation have been executed, check that the levels of the received power in both the terminals are in compliance to the project specification.
4.2.4.8
Restore of the operating conditions

Once the checks on the connection have been executed, restore the operating conditions of the system (removing the possible manual forcing).

4 - ACTIVATION
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 4.3 LIST AND USE OF ACCESSORIES
The accessories required for carrying out check measurements, repairs and parts replacements of equipment the SRA 4 system consists of, are delivered for each station where the equipment itself is installed. This paragraph contains useful indications for the correct use and for the identification of the accessories that are grouped under the P/N 597-524/95.
4.3.1
List and use of accessories

See Tab. 4.2.
Tab. 4.2
Station accessories Code 323-502/01 323-502/11 323-500/99 204-371/07D 207-501/07D 204-371/09D 206-701/05D 314-101/76 Q.ty 1 1 1 4 8 4 4 1 Use It is used for the fixing subrack to the rack It is used for the assembling and disassembling of the mechanical parts It is used for the SMA connectors tightening It is used to tighten to transition to the w/g section and to the RT It is used for connecting the PC to IDU
Denomination Scredriver for screws 4,5x80 Scredriver for 3x60 Phillips screws Dynamometric key Exagonal head screw 3 x 8 Elastic washer 3 Exagonal head screw 3 x 12 Exagonal nut 3 Cable, connection, 9 contacts female/male (L = 2.6 m)

4 - ACTIVATION
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 4.4 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITIONS AND ALARMS
4.4.1 Normal operating conditions
Normal operating conditions of the equipment are indicated as follows: All red LEDs on the front panel of the units: OFF RF output power and RF input power at nominal values.
The normal operating conditions of the front panel LEDs are shown in Fig. 4.4, Fig. 4.5, Fig. 4.6 and Fig. 4.7.
4.4.2
Alarm conditions
An alarm condition indicates a failure in the outdoor or indoor unit. An alarm condition in the equipment is indicated by the switching on of a red LED on the front panel of the failed unit. The alarms are also processed and managed by the Controller unit. The LCT, connected to the Controller unit, allows an easy location of the failed unit.
Fig. 4.4
LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 1+0/1+1 system (SRA4 IDU)
GREEN ON See Tab. 6.1
See Tab. 6.1
OFF
OFF
Unita RESTITUTORE ALLRMI
CHA
CHB
ODU ALM
CABLE ALM
CO-CHANNEL
I Out
ODU PWR
ON OFF
IF CABLE
Alarms Key ON
IDU PWR OF
Unita FAN Unita CONTROLLORE
USER
V11 G703
I
STM-n #1 WST
Out I Out
STM-n #2
I Out
Exp. Port
PS
IF CABLE OFF
CHA
CHB
ODU ALM
CABLE ALM
CO-CHANNEL
I Out
ODU PWR
ON
Q-lan
E-Link
LCT
T E S T
M N / W
C / M J
USER
V11 G703
I
WST
Out
STM-n #1
I Out
STM-n #2
I Out
Exp. Port
PS
OFF GREEN ON

4 - ACTIVATION

Fig. 4.5 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 1+0/1+1 system (SRA4 IDU-STM1)
OFF OFF GREEN ON See Tab. 6.1
See Tab. 6.1
OFF GREEN ON
Fig. 4.6
LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 2x(1+1)CC system (SRA4 IDU)
GREEN ON
OFF
See Tab. 6.1
OFF
OFF
U n. F A N
V-pol. IDU
U V11 S E R
WST G703 In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
IF
CH. 1
PS IF
CHACHB
U V11 S E R
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
CH. 2
PS
U n. F A N
H-pol. IDU
Q-lan E-Link
U V11 S E R
WST G703 In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
IF
CH. 1
PS IF
CHACHB
U V11 S E R
LCT
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
CH. 2
PS
E-link Co-Channel coax cables

4 - ACTIVATION

Fig. 4.7 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a N+1 configuration (SRA4 IDU)
GREEN ON
OFF
See Tab. 6.1
OFF
OFF
U n. F A N
IDU MAIN
Q-lan E-Link LCT
U V11 S E R
WST G703 In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
IF
STBY
PS IF
CHACHB
U V11 S E R
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
CH. 1
PS
IDU EXT
Q-lan E-Link
U n. F A N
U V11 S E R
WST G703 In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
IF
CH. 2
PS IF
CHACHB
U V11 S E R
LCT
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
CH. 3
PS
E-link
B-link

5 - MAINTENANCE
5 MAINTENANCE
5.1 TROUBLESHOOTIN614-041/17G AND RESTORING
This paragraph instructs about troubleshooting to be carried out on the equipment. The malfunctions are pointed out by LEDs on the equipment, on the indoor assembly front panel (see Fig. 5.1, Fig. 5.2 and Fig. 5.3). The indications function on the front panel is described in the par. 6.3 "LED, MONITORING POINTS, CONNECTORS AND SWITCHES". The sequence of the recommended actions to locate a faulty part of the equipment, to replace it and to restore the service, are schematized in Fig. 5.5.
5.1.1
Troubleshooting
The failed unit is located by using the LCT: refer to the document "Guide to the use of the control software", which is part of the Operator Manual (OMN).
Fig. 5.1
LEDs in 1+1/2+0 configuration (SRA4 IDU)
Unita RESTITUTORE ALLRMI
CHA
CHB
ODU ALM
CABLE ALM
CO-CHANNEL
I Out
ODU PWR
ON OFF
IF CABLE
Alarms Key ON
IDU PWR OF
Unita FAN Unita CONTROLLORE
USER
V11 G703
I
STM-n #1 WST
Out I Out
STM-n #2
I Out
Exp. Port
PS
IF CABLE OFF
CHA
CHB
ODU ALM
CABLE ALM
CO-CHANNEL
I Out
ODU PWR
ON
Q-lan
E-Link
LCT
T E S T
M N / W
C / M J
USER
V11 G703
I
WST
Out
STM-n #1
I Out
STM-n #2
I Out
Exp. Port
PS
T E S T
M N / W
C / M J

5 - MAINTENANCE

Fig. 5.2 LEDs in 1+1/2+0 configuration (SRA4 IDU-STM1)
T E S T
M N / W
C / M J
Fig. 5.3
LEDs in N+1 configuration (SRA4 IDU)
T E S T
M N / W
C / M J
U n. F A N
IDU MAIN
Q-lan E-Link LCT
U V11 S E R
WST G703 In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
IF
STBY
PS IF
CHACHB
U V11 S E R
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
CH. 1
PS
IDU EXT
Q-lan E-Link
U n. F A N
U V11 S E R
WST G703 In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
IF
CH. 2
PS IF
CHACHB
U V11 G703 S E R
LCT
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
CH. 3
PS
E-link
B-link

5 - MAINTENANCE

5.1.2 Replacement procedures
This paragraph contains the instruction to carry out the system parts fault replacement. Follow the instructions step by step, otherwise the SW configuration could be lost, and therefore the LCT is necessary for a new SW configuration setting. Note: IDU front panel LEDs gives fault status general information; in case of a more deep investigation about cause and severity one alarm is requested, the LCT is necessary.
5.1.2.1
ODU replacement
1. 2. 3. 4. Power down the ODU (switch on the right side of the relevant BB+MODEM unit in the IDU) (ODU PWR OFF). Replace the ODU. Power up the ODU (switch on the right side of the relevant BB+MODEM unit in the IDU) (ODU PWR ON). Verify that the link has been recovered (no alarms)
5.1.2.2
IDU-ODU cable replacement

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn the ODU off by the switch on the front panel of the BB+MODEM unit (ODU PWR OFF). Disconnect the fault IDO-ODU connection cable. Connect a new IDU-ODU cable. Turn the ODU on (ODU PWR ON). Verifies that the LEDs on the BB+MODEM unit are in the normal operating conditions. Otherwise, see Troubleshooting through LCT (OMN manual).
5.1.2.3
IDU unit replacement
5.1.2.3.1 BB+MODEM unit

BB/modem unit 1 in STI systems 1. Change the system type: Should the current system type be 1+1 FD STI, change to 1+1 FD DTI Should the current system type be 1+1 HSBY STI, change to 1+1 HSBY DTI. Move the cables (or the optical fibers) of the STM-1#1 signal (and of the STM-1#2 signal in case of 2xSTM-1 capacity) on the front panel of the BB/modem unit 2 and then set immediately the switch mode to MANUAL and set the Tributary switch to channel 2. Switch off ODU 1, disconnect all the cables, connected on the front panel of the BB/modem unit 1, and extract the BB/modem unit 1.
2.
3.

5 - MAINTENANCE

4. 5. 6. 7. Insert the spare BB/modem unit (with the ODU switch in position OFF) and connect again all the cables, except the STM-1 cables. Switch on ODU 1, wait the on-line state of the BB/modem unit 1 and the completion of the cable compensation procedure. Set again the switches to the AUTO mode. Move the cables (or the optical fibers) of the STM-1#1 signal (and of the STM-1#2 signal in case of 2xSTM-1 capacity) on the front panel of the BB/modem unit 1 and then force immediately the Tributary switch on channel 1. Change the system type: Should the current system type be 1+1 FD DTI, change to 1+1 FD STI Should the current system type be 1+1 HSBY DTI, change to 1+1 HSBY STI.
8.
The procedure does not protect the service channels.
BB/modem unit 2 in STI systems or BB/modem unit 1 and 2 in DTI systems 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Set the switch mode to MANUAL and set the Tributary switch to channel 1 (should unit 2 be replaced) or to channel 2 (should unit 1 be replaced). Switch off the ODU, disconnect all the cables, connected on the front panel of the BB/modem unit, and extract the BB/modem unit. Insert the spare BB/modem unit (with the ODU switch in position OFF) and connect again all the cables. Switch on the ODU, wait the completion of the on-line and cable compensation procedures. Set again the switches to the AUTO mode.
5.1.2.3.2 Controller unit

1. 2. 3. Remove the front panel of the unit by unscrewing the 2 screws on the sides. Remove the faulty unit by using the two levers on the sides. Insert the spare Controller unit. The equipment configuration that has been memorised on the KEY will be automatically entered on the new Controller unit.

5 - MAINTENANCE

5.1.2.3.3 Alarm Restitution Unit
The Alarm Restitution unit replacement must be carried out after a proper procedure driven by a LCT command. In fact its bare removal causes the System switching off, since the unit holds the power switch. A bypass switch within the BB/Modem unit allows the powering of the whole equipment. This switch is available in the BB/Modem unit with P/N 612-314/07 for the electrical version and P/N 612-314/06 for the optical version. An FPGA register allows the Controller to recognize if this feature is supported by the BB/Modem unit. This feature is available starting from SVR 4.5. It provides an activation command to force the bypass switch and an automatic switch off command 3 minutes later. This time is long enough to replace the failed Alarm Restitution unit and avoids dangerous overheating (fans are supplied only by Alarm Restitution unit). Hardware details are shown in Fig. 5.4. An OptoMOS relay (normally open) placed in the BB/Modem unit acts as an electronic switch: a command coming from the Controller Unit causes the by-pass of the mechanical switch housed in the Alarm Restitution unit. A current sensor makes the actual command status available to the FPGA for reporting to the Controller. Fig. 5.4 Alarm
Restitution Unit
Alarm Restitution unit replacement management BB/MODEM Unit Controller Unit DC/DC
Converter
Tertiary voltages
Power switch
Check and status
Command
DC/DC
12 V
New BB board indicator
Replacement procedure: 1. 2. Connect the LCT to the equipment. To replace the Alarm Restitution Unit without the switching off of the radio system, follow the procedure explained in the SRA 4 OMN Manual para. 6.7.1.6 (Maintenance).

5 - MAINTENANCE

5.1.2.3.4 Fans unit
1. 2. Fig. 5.5 Push up-side the switch on the front panel (in position OPEN). Remove the unit by using the handle on the front panel.
Flow chart No. 1 - Intervention procedure because of failure

5 - MAINTENANCE
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 5.2 LIST OF SPARE PARTS
The chosen maintenance philosophy anticipates substitution of an outdoor assembley (ODU) or a failed unit (baseband section - IDU). Therefore all spares consist of outdoor assembly and units that are equal to the ones used in the equipment itself. In the baseband section, a spare unit substitutes the corresponding failed unit completely.
5.2.1
Tab. 5.1
IDU spare parts list

List of spare parts - IDU Denomination BB-MODEM unit with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) or BB-MODEM unit with optical interface (32/128 TCM) P/N 612-314/07 612-314/06
SRA4 IDU
SRA4 IDU-STM1 Controller unit
BB-MODEM unit with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) or BB-MODEM unit with optical interface (32/128 TCM)
612-314/65 612-314/64 634-001/02 614-104/66 614-041/17 628-587/10 224-065/54
Alarm Restitution unit Fan unit Wired subrack Cover
5.2.2
ODU spare parts list

Every ODU has been adjusted in factory at the RF channel frequency. Refer to par. 2.2.7 to see the complete list of the available ODU .
5.2.2.1
Tab. 5.2
AP ODU
7 GHz ODU P/N 735-201/07-xxx
Tab. 5.3
8 GHz ODU P/N

5 - MAINTENANCE

Tab. 5.3 8 GHz 735-201/08-xxx Tab. 5.4 10 GHz ODU P/N 735-201/10-xxx Tab. 5.5 11 GHz ODU P/N 735-201/11-xxx Tab. 5.6 13 GHz ODU P/N 735-201/13-xxx
5.2.2.2
Tab. 5.7
AP/CC ODU
6 GHz (6L) ODU P/N 735-211/06-xxx
Tab. 5.8
6 GHz (6U) ODU P/N 735-211/06-xxx
Tab. 5.9
7 GHz ODU P/N 735-211/07-xxx
Tab. 5.10
8 GHz ODU P/N 735-211/08-xxx

5 - MAINTENANCE

Tab. 5.11 11 GHz ODU P/N 735-211/11-xxx Note - The ODUs can be used also as spare parts of the previous ODUs according to the following table:
ODU P/N 735-211/11-110 735-211/11-111 735-211/11-160 735-211/11-161 735-211/11-210 735-211/11-211 735-211/11-260 735-211/11-261 735-211/11-310 735-211/11-311 735-211/11-360 735-211/11-361
as Spare part also of the ODU 735-211/11-100 735-211/11-101 735-211/11-150 735-211/11-151 735-211/11-200 735-211/11-211 735-211/11-250 735-211/11-251 735-211/11-300 735-211/11-301 735-211/11-350 735-211/11-351
Tab. 5.12
13 GHz ODU P/N 735-211/13-xxx

5 - MAINTENANCE
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 5.3 PROCEDURE FOR SPARE PARTS USE
This paragraph illustrates the procedure to use when having to replace the faulty unit of the IDU and the faulty ODU. To simplify the description, the following procedures concern the disassembling of the parts to replace. Obviously to place the spare part back proceed in the opposite manner.
5.3.1
Procedure for the IDU unit replacement

Refer to par. 5.1.2.3 "IDU unit replacement".
5.3.2
Procedure for the ODU replacement

To replace the ODU remove the ODU from the supporting framework fastened to the mast. The procedure to follow is specified below (refer to Fig. 5.6): a) b) c) d) e) Switch off the ODU by using the switch on the relevant BB/Modem unit (ODU PWR OFF) in the IDU. Pull out the IF cable. Disconnect ground. Disconnect the RF waveguide. Loosen and remove the four bottom screws (S1-S4). Lift the ODU, so as to free it from the hooks on the support, and remove it.

5 - MAINTENANCE

Fig. 5.6 ODU Disconnection
TOP VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW

5 - MAINTENANCE

LA
PA G E
6 - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
6 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
6.1 ODU FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
6.1.1 General description
The IF signals, coming/sent from/to the IDU, are properly treated in the IF subunit. Here a primary lightning protection and the DC extraction are performed. A diplexer sends the IF signals to the IF sections and the FSK subcarrier to the modem unit. The power supply returns to the IF subunit the required voltages to be distributed to the other utilizers. The Rx IF (140 MHz), coming from the microwave receiver, is addressed to the IDU while the Tx IF (350 MHz), coming from the IDU, is sent to the transceiver together a DC voltage: the presence of the DC voltage enables the transmitter to operate at fixed gain (AGC OFF). The IF unit houses the cable equalizer, a couple of PLL circuits, a frequency reference oscillator (TCXO) and a single chip microprocessor controller to manage the hardware inside the ODU. The dual VCO subunit provides a very low phase noise UHF signals to synchronize the RF VCOs. The transceiver interfaces the filter diplexer which insures the required decoupling between transmitter and receiver modules. The outdoor unit (ODU), shown in Fig. 6.1, is a cabinet containing: the RF parts, Microwave Diplexer Filter Dual UHF VCO subunit Microwave Transceiver Front-end (MWTF)
and a power supply distributor containig the outdoor side of a FSK modulated communication channel for IDU-ODU signalling: IF unit with FSK subunit Power supply


Fig. 6.1 Outdoor unit
RF GROUP COMPOSITION 1) Power supply 2) IF unit 3) MWTF 4) Dual UHF VCO 5) Filter duplexer
(5)
(4) RF AMPLIFIER RF VCO SYNT UHF (3) RF VCO RF RICEIVER
V C O
(1) FSK SUBUNIT (2) +6.5V +12V +25V 350 MHz 140 MHz -VB
TCXO
IF CABLE


6.1.2 Main characteristics
The ODU supports continous linear ATPC. The ODU has the following external connections: AGC voltage measurement on a BNC connector IF Connection for IDU-ODU cable connection (connector type N) Waveguide flange for connection to antenna An RS-232 interface accessible from outside the ODU is provided for the connection with a PC during tests, factory tuning and for Inventory (7C LEMO Connector) IF LO and RF LO connectors for the CC configuration.
6.1.3
6.1.3.1
Unit description
Power supply
Converts the DC voltage to the voltages required by other subunits, provides alarm for failures, extracts the DC voltage from the cable and insures the primary lightning protection. The ODU must withstand holes in the Power Supply Voltage coming from IDU up to 6 msec. A surge protector is also mounted on this unit to prevent any damage that can occur due to lightning discharge (5KV protection according to I.E.C. 801-5).
6.1.3.2
IF unit
Is a transversal unit; it includes IF duplexer, dual IF processing, dual PLL circuit, IDU/ODU communication channel, ODU hardware controller. A triplexer addresses the IF and FSK signals respectively to the IF sections and the FSK subcarriers toward the modem. The Tx IF (350MHz) is up-converted to 1690MHz, filtered and sent to the transmitter; the Rx IF, coming from the microwave receiver (2180MHz), is down-converted to 140MHz and sent to the IDU. The IF unit houses also the cable equalizer, a couple of PLL circuit, a frequency reference oscillator.


6.1.3.2.1 FSK sub-unit
This subunit collects, manages and processes the informations (alarms, commands, data channels) coming / going from / to the different units into the Radio Terminal Unit in the IDU. The communication between ODU and IDU is performed by FSK mo-demodulation of two distinct carriers at 10 MHz (from ODU to IDU) and at 7 MHz (from IDU to ODU). This unit has also the task to distribute the secondary voltages to all the units contained in the ODU.
6.1.3.3
Microwave Transceiver Front-end subunit

The subunit is composed of a transmitter section and a receiver section. The transmitter receives as input the 1690 MHz IF signal coming from the IF subunit and up converts it into a radio frequency signal by means of TX local oscillator. The signal is then amplified by the power section and transmitted to the microwave duplexer. The receiver section receives from the antenna a radio frequency signal, amplifies by means of a LNA and equalizes it, and then down converts it into a 2180 MHz IF signal by means of RX local oscillator. The IF signal is amplified and then transmitted to the IF subunit and then to the indoor unit (demodulator section). The two Local Oscillators (one for the transmitter section and one for the receiver section) are composed of two broadband VCOs phase locking to the UHF signal incoming from the DUAL UHF VCO. The Microwave Transceiver Front-end (MWTF) allows to translate a multilevel QAM modulated signal from the intermediate frequency IF to the microwave field and vice versa. MWTF operates in temperature range from -33 C to + 55 C. A simplified block diagram of the unit is shown in Fig. 6.2. The unit consists of a transmission up-converter (including the relevant phase lockable oscillator PLO), of a receiver down converter (including the relevant PLO) and a dc section including ALC driver telemetry/alarm and biasing circuits. The transmitter section includes a variable gain IF preamplifier and filter, IF linearizer, up-converter (which besides converting the IF signal must reject the Image and LO signals), a power stage an output detector. and a wave-guide isolator. The transmitter can support high complexity QAM modulation format. The transmitter always operates in closed loop. The EEPROM (previously programmed) suitable addressed, provides digital serial data to the IF PROCESSOR unit (an equipment that interface the MWTF unit trough a multipin connector). The digital data are analog converted inside the IF PROCESSOR and then returned to the microwave transceiver. The analog voltage is the reference for the ALC driver (Which contains a detector diode for temperature compensation) and supplied to the power control module (variable gain amplifier or variable attenuator). The receiver consists of a wave-guide isolator, an LNA, variable RF linear attenuator, an image rejection filter, a down converter-mixer and an IF stage with adjustable gain. The two PLOs (for the Tx and Rx sections) are implemented using the same circuit. A broadband VCO is phase locked to the UHF input signal according to the circuit of Fig. 6.2. Since the phase noise close to the carrier is determined by the UHF signal and above all because the microwave module is not mechanical isolated, the PLL filter must be dimensioned to have a cut-off frequency of about 10 MHz. The unit includes also five digital potentiometer with internal memory in order to set all the parameters necessary for the best working condition (Tx, Rx linearity, RF/IF receiver nominal gain).

Fig. 6.2
DOWN CONVERTER UP CONVERTER Tx AMPLIFIER
RF to DUPLEXER FILTER J3
xN
RF from DUPLEXER FILTER r2

LIN AM/AM AM/PM t2 t3 t1 Comp. Diode voltage
J2
r1
Rx AGC
MWTF simplified block diagram
xN
Det. Voltage ALC DRIVER
PLL VCO
IF 2180 MHz IF 1690 MHz
VCO
SQUELCH
:M
t1 t2 t3
r1 r2
PLL
:M +5 V
13dB PWR reduction
DIGITIL POTENTIOM. (with internal memory)

To/From From DUAL UNITA' IF VHF VCO
+5 V +5 V
From DUAL VHF VCO
DC SECTION
6-5

6.1.3.4 Dual UHF VCO subunit
The subunit is composed of two UHF VCOs: their frequencies are synthesized by means of two indipendent synthesizers placed in the IF subunit. The frequencies of the VCOs are used as reference frequencies for the Tx and Rx PLLs located in RF module. Both the oscillators have a low phase noise active device in order to guarantee the required noise specifications. The relative resonant cavity is a coaxial dielectric resonator with such a Q factor in order to achieve the required effective bandwidth varying the varactors voltage. Then the VCO output signal is opportunely amplified. With CC operations the two VCO subunits must be synchronized in Rx. This synchronisation is established through 2 coaxial cables situated between the two ODU's. Two synchronisms flow on the 2 cables, i.e., the first Rx conversion (from RF frequency to 2180 MHz) and the second Rx conversion (from 2180MHz to 140 MHz). With regard to CC operation, one of the two ODU's must be software-preset to Master (generates synchronisms) and the other ODU operating as Slave (receives the synchronisms from the ODU Master).
6.1.3.5
Microwave Duplexer filter

The Duplexer filter is composed of two band-pass microwave filters connecting the RF module to the antenna: in this way it is possible to use the same antenna to transmit and receive. The Microwave Duplexer insures the tunability in a quarter of RF band.
6.1.3.6
Tx Alarm
A loss of the RF transmitted power is detected with an alarm relayed via the FSK communication channel to the IDU.
6.1.3.7
ATPC option
In the equipment ATPC (Automatic Transmit Power Control) function is available. ATPC is linear and continuos.

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 6.2 IDU FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The IDU consists of 4 types of units connected together via the backplane: Fig. 6.3 Controller unit Alarm Restitution unit Fan unit BB-Modem unit par. 6.2.1 par. 6.2.2 par. 6.2.3 par. 6.2.4
IDU Subrack
SRA4 IDU
U n. F A N
U V11 S E R
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
IF
PS IF
CHACHB
U V11 S E R
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
G703
WST In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
STM-1 #2 Out In
ODU ALM
PS
Power supply + Alarms Fan Controller
IF + Modem + ODU Power supply Tributary + Services + ODU Power supply IF + Modem + ODU Power supply Tributary + Services + ODU Power supply
SRA4 IDU-STM1
Power supply + Alarms Fan Controller
IF + Modem + ODU Power supply Tributary + Services + ODU Power supply IF + Modem + ODU Power supply Tributary + Services + ODU Power supply


6.2.1 Controller unit
The function of the unit is of system controller and MCF. The unit configures the system and controls the alarm system by managing the right transit and the transmission of the payload and service streams. The following are also provided: the F Interface for the LCT, the Q interface for the supervisory system and the 4 general alarm indicating LEDs of the system.
6.2.2
Alarm Restitution Unit

The function of the unit is of restituting the system alarms managed by the Controller unit and of making the remote-commands/remote controls of the remote station available to the external source through a Sub-D connector fitted on the front panel. It also manages the 2 fans present on the subrack and their failure. The switch used to switch ON the equipment is fitted on the front panel together with a connector for the insertion of the Memory Key.
6.2.3
Fan unit
Two fans are present on this unit, which constantly ventilate the IDU assembly.
6.2.4
BB-MODEM unit
The unit carries out the following operation: STM-1 input/output interfacing and base band processing; this interface can either be of the electric or of the optical type. Base band processing is of the RSA type (Regenerator Section Adaptation); the MSA function (Multiplex Section Adaptation) is not implemented. Drop/Insert of the 2 Mb/s stream as WS traffic (Way Side) (not available in the BB-Modem units P/N 612-314/64-65). Drop/Insert of the two 64 kbit/s housekeeping channels (G703 and V11). Generation of a 350MHz IF modulated signal for the ODU transmitter. Processing and demodulation of the 140MHz IF signal incoming from the ODU receiver. The IF IDU-ODU cable interface, suitable to power the ODU, suitable for IF Tx and Rx connections, IDU-ODU alarms and housekeeping communications through the FSK modulated sub-carriers.
6.2.4.1
BB Section
Refer to Fig. 6.4. The CMI (G.703) coded input signal is amplified, converted from CMI to NRZ and converted from serial to parallel. The data is then transmitted to the T-RSOH drop block, which will carry out the following RSOH terminating functions:


frame alignment through the searching of the A1 and A2 bytes of the STM-1 frame data descrambling calculation of the BIP-8 parity with the B1 received bytes check of any other alarms contained in the SOH bytes (e.g., MS-AIS. MS-RDI) D1, D2, D3 and D4-D12 transit transparently (they are not managed) E1 transits transparently (it is not managed) F1 is dropped if configured as 64 kbit/s AUX or transits transparently.
Therefore the signal is sent to the R-RSOH insert circuit in order to insert the new bytes of the RSOH, including the 64 kbit/s signals or the 2 Mbit/s WST one. The tributary switch will receive the cited signal or that coming from the other BB+MODEM unit (should the tributary be protected) and make it transit. On the Receive side the signal coming from the Modem section enters the Hitless switch through one path, while on the other path enters the signal incoming from the second BB+MODEM unit, i.e., in case of the 1+1 configuration. Based on the alarms of the Modem section the Hitless switch extracts the best signal and hitless switches (without errors). At the output of the hitless switch are carried out operations on the RSOH bytes that are complementary to those carried out on the transmission side. The signal is hence parallel-to-serial converted and then CMI encoded ready to be forwarded to the output. Note: With regard to the 1+0 configuration, the switches are fixed and allow the transit of the signal coming from the unit proper.


Fig. 6.4 Block diagram of the BB-MODEM unit: BB Section
From other MOD AUX channels TRIB switch STM-1 To MOD BYTE_OUT
S2P S2P
T-RSOH drop
R-RSOH insert B1 regeneration, Insertion of : J0, WS, DCC-R Clock 155
ATPC insert P2S
STM-1
(*)
LOS, LOF, J0(TIM), B1, PM, MS-AIS, MSRDI, DCC-R mng
Main / Prot
CPU 16 MB SDRAM 2x4 MB FLASH 2 MB EEPROM AUX channels STM-1 CMI P2S T-RSOH insert R-RSOH drop LOF, J0 (TIM), B1, PM, DCC-R mng SWITCH hitless ATPC drop
FSK processing
To MOD
BYTE_IN From its own local DEM From prot DEM
STM-1
(*)
8 Clock 155
(*) not available in the BB-Modem units P/N 612-314/64-65
6.2.4.2
Modem Section
6.2.4.2.1 Overview
The functions performed by the modulator and demodulator are here below set down: the pulse formation is obtained through techniques of digital signal processing (DSP). The BB filtering is realized by digital FIR (Finite Impulse Response) filters and it implements a formation of raised cosine pulse with a suitable roll-off factor. At modulator side, these devices have fully programmable coefficients while, at demodulator side, the Rx filters have been designed with fixed coefficient structure. The two post-modulation and post-demodulation filters are of analog and anti-aliasing type. As the number of modulation states increases, the radio systems become more vulnerable to multipath fading. The Adaptive Time Domain Equalizer (ATDE) represents a powerful solution which shows a better performance vs. complexity ratio, together with a lower sensitivity to timing phase. High performances are assured by dinamic convergence, accomplished by means of a modified minimum mean-square error (MMSE) algorithm exhibiting "blind" converegence acquisition, combined with the recursive updating of tap coefficients.


The TCM coding utilization for the error correction allows the spectral net requested spectral efficiency is easily met by adopting a non-critical roll-off factor. A 2 or 4-dimension trellis coding associated with an M-QAM crossed format has been adopted as the more effective solution as far as the transmission efficacy is concerned as well as of total performances. A maximum likelihood decoding procedure applies to the received sequence of 2D/4D points by means of a Viterbi algorithm. In case of 4D costellation as a preliminary step, the decoder detects the received 4D point; it divides it into a pair of 2D points and the closest point in each 4D subset and its metrics ("Euclidean distance" between the two points) are evaluated on the basis the 2D points and metric estimation. The foregoing process can iteratively evaluate all the points in each multidimensional subset. By means of the Viterbi decoder the most probable transmitted sequence of subsets is then estimated. The process implies a slight complexity increase but operates at half the speed (considering two successive symbols at the same time). The errors detected by the decoder allow two BER alarm thresholds to be provided (FAST BER), to activate the Early Warning switching by means of the integrated hitless protection system.


6.2.4.2.2 Cross Polarization Interface Canceller (XPIC) (not available in the BB-Modem units P/N 612-314/64-65)
The XPIC is automatically enabled in co-channel configuration. Co-channel operation with high level modulation schemes requires very high cross-polarization descrimination (XPD). Modern radio relay antennas meet the XPD requirements at least under ideal propagation conditions; nevertheless cross-polarization interference (XPI) between orthogonally arranged channels may increase under particular conditions such as rainfall or multipath propagation. As additional mean to counteract these phenomena, a powerful cross-polarization interference canceller devices has been fit into the demodulator. Since the interference effects are time variable, the XPIC device structure (shown in Fig. 6.5) is adaptive, consisting also of transversal filter. At transmit side, it is not requested neither the common use for the V and H channels of a single L.O. nor the synchronization of the two used oscillators. There is also no strict requirement for clock synchronization at transmit side. At receive side, beside the exchange of the received data signals at IF level, the only interconnection between vertical and horizontal channel is the L.O. synchronization of the receivers and no additional clock synchronization of the demodulators is necessary. Another advantage of this concept is the independence of the XPIC operation from the lock-in state of the carrier recovery being the carrier frequencies of the interfering signal and the compensation signal identical at the adder point. This greatly improves performances after strong XPI events since the XPIC can first remove the XPI on the main signal, thus facilitating the subsequent lock-in procedure. Fig. 6.5 XPIC Concept


6.2.4.2.3 Block diagram
Refer to Fig. 6.6. The interface with the BB section is at byte level, the IF one is at 350 MHz on the uplink and 140 MHz on the downlink. The modem implements a TCM encoding linked to a Reed Solomon. A bit interleaver protects the pointer and reduces pointer slip. A byte interleaver distributes the error burst generated by the TCM decoder in order to guarantee and efficient linked code. Sampling is asynchronous both on the transmission side and on the receive side and it always takes place at 200 MHz. This latter frequency is obtained through a quartz-crystal oscillator. A variable interpolator matches the symbol frequency to the sampling frequency. The transmission carrier is obtained from another 350 MHz quartz-crystal oscillator. On the receive side instead, the 140 MHz IF is directly sampled hence a direct modulation is obtained. The two IF signals are combined through a splitter, which guarantees the required isolation between the two paths. Over the same coaxial cable is established the dialogue (alarm and control signal) between the Outdoor Section and the Indoor Section through two further FSK modulated sub-carriers whose frequencies are respectively 10 MHz for the Outdoor signal and 7 MHz for the Indoor signal. The Modem section also operates as a collector of the data to send to the Controller. In fact, through the data bus the Controller receives the information concerning failures on the outdoor unit (ODU) or on the cable interconnecting the ODU and Modem.
According to a software setting the modulation scheme can be 128 TCM-4D or 32 TCM-2D.


Fig. 6.6 Block diagram of the BB-MODEM unit: MODEM Section
BYTE_IN CK_IN
I
DAC
BYTE_OUT CK_OUT
BB PROC
p/2 FSK MODEM 350 MHz clock XO offset (from BB proc.) ADC :2 7 MHz (Tx) TRIP 10 MHz (Rx) 140 MHz (Rx) IF 350 MHz (Tx)
PLL RX byte (19.44 / 38.88)
peak (from BB proc.) IFX OUT
200 MHz clock XO :1 ADC IFX IN

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 6.3 LED, MONITORING POINTS, CONNECTORS AND SWITCHES
In this paragraph are reported the operations of all the control and command elements that are present on the front panels of the units making up the equipment. Fig. 6.7 illustrates the front panel of the indoor assembly showing the LEDs, the monitoring points, the connectors and the control elements. The list and the function of the LEDs are reported in Tab. 6.1.
In the N+1 configuration some connectors are not used. The not used connectors are shown in Fig. 3.51. Fig. 6.7
9
Front panel of the SRA4 IDU with electrically interfaced BB-MODEM unit
8 10 7 7 7 12 12 6 5
Key
U n. F A N
U S E R
WST V11 G703 In Out
STM-1 #1 In Out
ODU ALM STM-1 #2 In Out
CABLE ALM
CO-CH Out
ODU PWR I O
IF
Exp. Port In
PS
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
13
12
12
11
1 - Connector RJ45 for 64 kbit/s data channels : (byte F1: int. V.11; byte S23: int. G.703) or (byte F1: int. G.703; byte S23: int. V.11) (In N+1 configuration byte F1 is used only) 2 - Connector SubD-9 RS-232 for LCT links 3 - 1-0/2.3 coaxial connector for STM-1 traffic 4 - 1-0/2.3 coaxial connector for 2 Mbit/s WST traffic 5 - SMA connector for ODU connection 6 - ODU power supply switch (with protection against accidental activation) 7 - LED 8 - Connector for the KEY 9 - SubD-25 connector for in/out parallel alarms, remote control 10 - IDU general power supply switch (with protection against accidental activation) 11 - Bipolar connector for station battery 12 - Not used 13 - RJ45 connector for the Q supervisory interface


Fig. 6.8 Front panel of the SRA4 IDU with optically interfaced BB-MODEM unit
10
12
12
Key
U n. F A N
U S E R
WST V11 G703 In Out
STM-1 #1 Out In
ODU ALM STM-1 #2 Out In
CABLE ALM
CO-CH Out
ODU PWR I O
IF
Exp. Port In
PS
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
13
12
12
11
1 - Connector RJ45 for 64 kbit/s data channels : (byte F1: int. V.11; byte S23: int. G.703) or (byte F1: int. G.703; byte S23: int. V.11) (In N+1 configuration byte F1 is used only) 2 - SubD-9 RS-232 connector for LCT link 3 - Optical connector for STM-1 traffic 4 - 1-0/2.3 Coaxial connector for 2 Mbit/s WST traffic 5 - SMA connector for ODU connection 6 - ODU power supply switch (with protection against accidental activation) 7 - LED 8 - Connector for the KEY 9 - SubD-25 connector for in/out parallel alarms, remote control 10 - IDU general power supply switch (with protection against accidental activation) 11 - Bipolar connector for the station battery 12 - Not used 13 - RJ45 connector for the supervisory Q interface


Fig. 6.9
8
Front panel of the SRA4 IDU-STM1 with electrically interfaced BB-MODEM unit
7 9 6 6 5 4
12
11
10
1 - Connector RJ45 for 64 kbit/s data channels : (byte F1: int. V.11; byte S23: int. G.703) or (byte F1: int. G.703; byte S23: int. V.11) (In N+1 configuration byte F1 is used only) 2 - Connector SubD-9 RS-232 for LCT links 3 - 1-0/2.3 coaxial connector for STM-1 traffic 4 - SMA connector for ODU connection 5 - ODU power supply switch (with protection against accidental activation) 6 - LED 7 - Connector for the KEY 8 - SubD-25 connector for in/out parallel alarms, remote control 9 - IDU general power supply switch (with protection against accidental activation) 10 - Bipolar connector for station battery 11 - Not used 12 - RJ45 connector for the Q supervisory interface


Fig. 6.10
8
Front panel of the SRA4 IDU-STM1 with optically interfaced BB-MODEM unit
7 9 6 6 5 4
12
11
10
1 - Connector RJ45 for 64 kbit/s data channels : (byte F1: int. V.11; byte S23: int. G.703) or (byte F1: int. G.703; byte S23: int. V.11) (In N+1 configuration byte F1 is used only) 2 - Connector SubD-9 RS-232 for LCT links 3 - Optical connector for STM-1 traffic 4 - SMA connector for ODU connection 5 - ODU power supply switch (with protection against accidental activation) 6 - LED 7 - Connector for the KEY 8 - SubD-25 connector for in/out parallel alarms, remote control 9 - IDU general power supply switch (with protection against accidental activation) 10 - Bipolar connector for station battery 11 - Not used 12 - RJ45 connector for the Q supervisory interface


Tab. 6.1 Summary of the front panel LEDs Unit LED ODU Alarm Colour Red Meaning General ODU alarm: The alarm is dropped at Base-Band level. It lights up when an alarm is present on the ODU or the ODU is disconnected.
CABLE Alarm
Yellow CABLE alarm: lights up when current drain is lower than expected. The causes might be due to the cable either breaking down or being disconnected, or to absence of ODU. Red CABLE alarm: lights up when current drain is higher than expected. The cause might be due to a short-circuit on the cable or on the ODU.
BB+MODEM Unit (Note 3)
CH A Green Channel 1 currently used; the unit is currently (Note 1, 2) operating by using channel 1 (Refer to Fig. 6.11 and Fig. 6.12). Yellow Channel 1 currently used by a software forcing (Refer to Fig. 6.11 and Fig. 6.12). CH B Green Channel 2 currently used; the unit is currently (Note 1, 2) operating by using channel 2 (Refer to Fig. 6.13 and Fig. 6.14). Yellow Channel 2 currently used by a software forcing (Refer to Fig. 6.13 and Fig. 6.14). ' Red General unit alarm: the LED is ON if the battery cable is disconnected.
Green Power Supply Status: the LED is ON in case of normal operating condition. ' TEST Red General alarm inside the unit: Card Fail alarm.
Yellow Unusual alarm: The LED lights up when the equipment is not operating according to what configured, but is "forced" into an unusual condition. Red Critical/ Major alarm: If ON it denotes the presence of a Critical/Major" alarm inside the IDU, for which an immediate (Critical) or urgent (Major) corrective action is required. Minor/ Warning alarm: If ON it denotes the presence of a "Minor/Warning" alarm inside the IDU, for which a corrective action is not urgently required.
CONTROLLER Unit
CRITICAL/ MAJOR
MINOR / WARNING
Red
Note 1: This LED displays the position of the Rx switch. Note 2: In the N+1 configuration this LED is always OFF on the Standby BB-Modem unit. Note 3: In N+1 configuration on the BB-Modem units relevant to the protected channels LED CH. A and CH. B have the following meaning: CH.A ON, CH. B OFF: working channel CH. A OFF, CH. B ON: channel on standby.


Fig. 6.11 LED CH. A ON: block diagram without tributary protection
64 kbit/s V.11/G.703
BB UNIT 1
Data Interface Switch Tx Modulator fixed
STM-1 electrical/optical
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
Tx1 Tx2
ODU
STM-1 electrical/optical 64 kbit/s V.11/G.703
Switch Rx Ch.A SDH Interface T-RSOH L-RSOH Ch.B
Demodulator
Data Interface
BB UNIT 2
SDH Interface T-RSOH L-RSOH Tx2 Tx1 Switch Tx Modulator fixed
ODU
Switch Rx SDH Interface T-RSOH L-RSOH not used Ch.A
Ch.B
Demodulator


Fig. 6.12 LED CH. A ON: block diagram with tributary protection (with SRA4 IDU only)
64 kbit/s V.11/G.703
BB UNIT 1
Data Interface Switch Tx Modulator
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
Tx1 Tx2
ODU
Switch Rx STM-1 electrical/optical 64 kbit/s V.11/G.703 SDH Interface T-RSOH L-RSOH
Ch.A Ch.B
Demodulator
Data Interface
BB UNIT 2
STM-1 electrical/optical SDH Interface T-RSOH L-RSOH Tx2 Tx1 Switch Tx Modulator
ODU
Switch Rx SDH Interface T-RSOH L-RSOH Ch.A
Ch.B
Demodulator


Fig. 6.13 LED CH. B ON: block diagram without tributary protection
64 64 kbit/s kbit/s V.11/G.703 V.11/G.703
BB UNIT 1
Data Data Interface Interface Tx1 Tx2 Switch Tx Modulator Modulator fixed
STM-1 STM-1 electrical/optical electrical/optical
SDH SDH Interface Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
ODU
STM-1 STM-1 electrical/optical 64 64 kbit/s kbit/s V.11/G.703 V.11/G.703
Switch Rx Ch.A SDH SDH Interface Interface T-RSOH L-RSOH Ch.B
Demodulator
Data Data Interface Interface
BB UNIT 2
SDH SDH Interface Interface T-RSOH L-RSOH Tx2 Tx2 Tx1 Tx1 Switch Tx Modulator fixed
ODU
Switch Rx SDH SDH Interface Interface T-RSOH L-RSOH not used Ch.A Ch.A
Ch.B Ch.B
Demodulator


Fig. 6.14 LED CH. B ON: block diagram with tributary protection (with SRA4 IDU only)
64 kbit/s V.11/G.703
BB UNIT 1
Data Interface Switch Tx Modulator fixed
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
Tx1 Tx2
ODU
Switch Rx STM-1 electrical/optical 64 kbit/s V.11/G.703 SDH Interface T-RSOH L-RSOH
Ch.A Ch.B
Demodulator
Data Interface
BB UNIT 2
STM-1 electrical/optical SDH Interface T-RSOH L-RSOH Tx2 Tx1 Switch Tx Modulator fixed
ODU
Switch Rx STM-1 electrical/optical SDH Interface T-RSOH L-RSOH not used Ch.A
Ch.B
Demodulator


LA
PA G E

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU)
SDH Split Radio
User Manual (UMN) 911-381/02C0000 Issue 7, March 2006
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) SDH Split Radio User Manual (UMN)
911-381/02C0000 Issue 7, March 2006
D.45
D.55
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) SDH Split Radio
User Manual (UMN)
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) SDH Split Radio User Manual (UMN)
911-381/02C0000 Issue 7, March 2006
D.25
911-381/02C0000
Issue 7, March 2006
D.30
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) SDH Split Radio
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) SDH Split Radio User Manual (UMN) 911-381/02C0000 Issue 7, March 2006
D.20
User Manual (UMN)

911-381/02C0000 Issue 7, March 2006
PRINTED in ITALY

Sra4-Umn 6-13ghz User Manual Ok

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Sra4-Umn 6-13ghz User Manual Ok

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

911-381/02C0000 Issue 7, March 2006

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

PRELIMINARY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

Contents of the user manual (UMN)

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

1.2 SAFETY RULES AND USE PRECAUTIONS

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

ITU-R F.383-7 ITU-R F.384-7